HTC PJ03110 Smartphone User Manual 1 of 2

HTC Corporation Smartphone 1 of 2

Contents

user manual 1 of 2

Your HTC ExplorerUser guideHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
ContentsGetting startedInside the box 8HTC Explorer 8Back cover 10SIM card 11Storage card 12Battery 13Switching the power on or off 14Entering your PIN 15Finger gestures 15Setting up HTC Explorer for the first time 16Ways of getting contacts into HTC Explorer 16Home screen 17BasicsAdjusting the volume 19Sleep mode 20Status and notifications 21Notifications panel 23Connecting HTC Explorer to a computer 25Copying files to or from the storage card 25Copying text, looking up information, and sharing 26PersonalizingMaking HTC Explorer truly yours 28Personalizing HTC Explorer with scenes 28Changing your wallpaper 29Applying a new skin 30Personalizing your Home screen with widgets 30Adding icons and other shortcuts on your Home screen 31Adding folders on your Home screen 32Rearranging or removing widgets and icons on your Home screen 32Rearranging the Home screen 33Customizing the shortcuts on the lock screen 33Using sound sets 34Rearranging or hiding application tabs 35Shortcuts & Clock widget 36Phone callsDifferent ways of making calls 38Making a call on the Phone dialer screen 38Using Speed dial 392 ContentsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Calling a phone number in a text message 40Calling a phone number in an email 40Calling a phone number in a Calendar event 40Making an emergency call 40Receiving calls 41What can I do during a call? 42Setting up a conference call 43Internet calls 44Using Call history 45Using Home dialing 46Call services 47Turning Airplane mode on or off 48Search and Web browserSearching HTC Explorer and the Web 49Using the web browser 50Downloading from the Web 52Viewing bookmarks and previously visited pages 53Setting browser options 54Accounts and syncAbout online accounts 56Synchronizing with a Google Account 56Adding a social network account 57Managing your online accounts 57PeopleTransferring contacts from your old phone 59About the People app 60Your contacts list 61Setting up your profile 62Importing contacts from your SIM card 62Adding a new contact 63Searching for contacts 63Importing a contact from an Exchange ActiveSync account 64Merging contact information 65Backing up your contacts to the storage card 66Contact information and conversations 66Sending contact information as a vCard 68Contact groups 69Adding People widgets 71SocialFacebook for HTC Sense 73Enjoying Facebook in Friend Stream 74Chatting in Google Talk 75CameraCamera basics 78Taking a photo 79Recording video 803 ContentsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Adding effects 80After capturing 80Changing camera settings 81Photos, videos, and musicGallery 82Music 89Android Market and other appsFinding and installing apps from Android Market 93Using the Clock 95Checking Weather 98Watching videos on YouTube 99Listening to FM Radio 100Recording your voice 101Sharing games and apps 102MessagesOpening Messages 103Sending a text message (SMS) 103Sending a multimedia message (MMS) 104Resuming a draft message 106Viewing and replying to a message 106Forwarding a message 107Viewing and saving an attachment from a multimedia message 108Push messages 108Managing message conversations 109Backing up your text messages to the storage card 110Setting message options 111EmailGmail 112Mail 113CalendarAbout Calendar 122Creating an event 122Changing Calendar views 123Managing Calendar events 124Accepting or declining a meeting invitation 125Dismissing or snoozing event reminders 126Showing or hiding calendars 126Changing Calendar settings 126About the Calendar widget 127Maps and locationLocation settings 128Google Maps 1284 ContentsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
HTC SyncAbout HTC Sync 133Installing HTC Sync 133Setting up HTC Sync to recognize HTC Explorer 134Getting to know the workspace 134Setting up synchronization 135Synchronizing HTC Explorer 138Installing an app from your computer to HTC Explorer 138Synchronizing another device with your computer 139Downloading the latest HTC Sync upgrade 139HTCSense.comSigning up for your HTCSense.com account 140Turning on Device finder 140Using HTCSense.com 141Deleting your HTCSense.com account 142KeyboardUsing the onscreen keyboard 143Entering words with predictive text 144Entering text by speaking 146Entering text by tracing 147Editing text 147Adjusting input settings 148Internet connectionsData connection 150Wi-Fi 151Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN) 152Using HTC Explorer as a modem (USB tethering) 154Connecting HTC Explorer to the Internet through a computer (Internet Pass-through) 154BluetoothBluetooth basics 155Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kit 155Disconnecting or unpairing from a Bluetooth device 156Sending information using Bluetooth 157Receiving information using Bluetooth 158SecurityProtecting your SIM card with a PIN 160Protecting HTC Explorer with a screen lock pattern, PIN, or password 160Encrypting data on HTC Explorer 162SettingsSettings on HTC Explorer 163Changing display settings 165Changing sound settings 166Changing the language 1675 ContentsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Optimizing battery life 168Managing memory 169Checking information about HTC Explorer 171Update and resetSoftware updates 172Restarting HTC Explorer 173Resetting HTC Explorer 173Trademarks and copyrightsIndex6 ContentsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Conventions used in this guideIn this user guide, we use the following symbols to indicate useful and importantinformation:This is a note. A note often gives additional information, such as what happenswhen you choose to do or not to do a certain action. A note also providesinformation that may only be applicable to some situations.This is a tip. A tip gives you an alternative way to do a particular step or procedure,or lets you know of an option that you may find helpful.This indicates important information that you need in order to accomplish a certaintask or to get a feature to work properly.This provides safety precaution information, that is, information that you need to becareful about to prevent potential problems.7 Conventions used in this guideHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Getting startedInside the boxYou will find the following inside the box:§HTC Explorer§Battery§USB cable§Power adapter§Quick start guide§Safety and regulatory guideHTC ExplorerFront panel1. Home 2. Menu 3. Back 4. Search 5. Microphone6. Touch screen7. Earpiece8 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Left and right panels1. USB connector2. VOLUME controlsBack panel1. 3 megapixel camera2. SpeakerTop panel1. 3.5mm headset jack2. POWER9 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Back coverRemoving the back coverRemove the back cover to access the battery compartment, SIM card slot, andstorage card slot.1. Turn off HTC Explorer and hold it securely upside down with the front facingaway from you.2. With your fingers, pry the bottom of the back cover away from the phone whilepressing in with your thumb against the middle of the back cover. Replacing the back cover1. Insert the top half of the phone into the top of the back cover. 2. Press the bottom part of the back cover towards the phone to lock the cover inplace. You'll hear a click when the back cover is locked in place.10 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
SIM cardThe SIM card contains your phone number, service details, and memory for storingphonebook contacts and/or text messages.Inserting the SIM card1. Take the back cover off.2. Remove the battery.3. With the SIM card’s gold contacts facing down and its cut-off corner facing out,insert the SIM card all the way into the SIM card slot. Removing the SIM cardMake sure to switch off HTC Explorer before removing your SIM card.1. Take the back cover off.2. Remove the battery.3. Press and hold the SIM card tab. 4. Slide the SIM card out from the SIM card slot.11 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Storage cardUse the storage card to store your photos, videos, and music.Inserting the storage card1. Take the back cover off.2. Insert the microSD card into the storage card slot with its gold contacts facingdown and slide it in until it is securely in place. Removing the storage cardIf HTC Explorer is on you must first "unmount" the storage card before removing itto prevent corrupting or damaging the files in the storage card.1. Take the back cover off.2. Slide the storage card out from its slot.Unmounting the storage cardWhen you need to remove the storage card while HTC Explorer is on, unmount thestorage card first to prevent corrupting or damaging the files in the storage card.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Storage > Unmount SD card.12 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
BatteryHTC Explorer uses a rechargeable battery. How long the battery can last before itneeds recharging depends on how you use HTC Explorer.The features and accessoriesyou use can affect battery life. For example, leaving your Bluetooth® connectionalways on uses more power. Long phone calls and frequent web browsing use up a lotof battery power. Also, consider your location: poor signal strength from your mobilenetwork and extreme temperature make the battery work harder.Removing the battery1. Take the back cover off.2. With your thumb or finger, lift the battery from the battery compartment. Inserting the batteryPlease use only original batteries that came in the box or replacements that werecommend.1. Take the back cover off.2. Insert the battery (with its exposed copper contacts first) into the batterycompartment. 13 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Charging the batteryBefore you turn on and start using HTC Explorer, it is recommended that you chargethe battery.§Only the power adapter and USB cable provided in the box must be used tocharge the battery.§Do not remove the battery from HTC Explorer while you are charging it using thepower or car adapter.1. Insert the small end of the USB cable into the USB connector. 2. Insert the other end of the USB cable into the power adapter.3. Plug in the power adapter to an electrical outlet to start charging the battery.When you charge the battery and HTC Explorer is on, the charging battery icon isdisplayed in the status bar. After the battery has been fully charged, the chargingbattery icon turns to a full battery icon .As a safety precaution, the battery stops charging when it overheats.Switching the power on or offSwitching the power onPress the POWER button. Easy. When you turn on HTC Explorer for the first time, you’ll need to set it up.14 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Switching the power off1. If the display is off, press the POWER button to turn it back on, then unlock thescreen.2. Press and hold the POWER button for a few seconds.3. When the Power options menu appears, tap Power off.Entering your PINMost SIM cards come with a PIN (personal identification number) set by your mobileoperator. If you’re asked for a PIN, enter it and then tap OK.If you enter the wrong PIN three times, your SIM card is blocked. No problem. Justcontact your mobile operator and ask for the PUK (PIN Unblocking Key).Finger gesturesTap When you want to type using the keyboard, select items onscreen suchas application and settings icons, or press onscreen buttons, simply tapthem with your finger.Press andholdTo open the available options for an item (for example, a contact or linkin a web page), simply press and hold the item.Swipe orslideTo swipe or slide means to quickly drag your finger vertically orhorizontally across the screen.Drag Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to drag.While dragging, do not release your finger until you have reached thetarget position.Flick Flicking the screen is similar to swiping, except that you need to swipeyour finger in light, quicker strokes. This finger gesture is always in avertical direction, such as when flicking the contacts or message list.Rotate For most screens, you can automatically change the screen orientationfrom portrait to landscape by turning HTC Explorer sideways. Whenentering text, you can turn HTC Explorer sideways to bring up a biggerkeyboard.Pinch In some apps, like Gallery or the web browser, you can “pinch” the screenusing two fingers (for example, thumb and index finger) to zoom in orzoom out when viewing a picture or a web page.15 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting up HTC Explorer for the first timeWhen you switch on HTC Explorer for the first time, you’ll be asked to set it up. Youcan choose how you want to connect to the Internet and whether you want yourcurrent location to be automatically detected. If you still have personal contacts andcalendar events stored on your old phone, you can easily transfer them toHTC Explorer through Bluetooth as well.Be sure to sign in to your Google® Account so you can use Google apps like Gmail™and Android Market™. You can also set up your other email accounts and Facebook®.Just follow the onscreen instructions and you’ll be up and running in no time.Some features that need to connect to the Internet such as location-based servicesand auto-sync of your online accounts may incur extra data fees. Don’t worry. Youcan enable or disable them in settings later on.Ways of getting contacts into HTC ExplorerThere are several ways you can add contacts to HTC Explorer. You can syncHTC Explorer with contacts from your Google Account, computer, Facebook, andmore.HTC Sync™Sync the contacts from your old phone to your computer, andthen use HTC Sync to sync HTC Explorer with your computer'sMicrosoft® Outlook®, Outlook Express or Windows® Contacts.Gmail Google contacts are imported to HTC Explorer after you sign in toyour Google Account. You can also create more Google contactsright from HTC Explorer.Facebook Log in to your Facebook account to import your Facebookfriends' contact information.Phone contacts You can choose to create and store contacts directly inHTC Explorer or transfer existing ones from your old phone.SIM card Copy all your SIM contacts to HTC Explorer.MicrosoftExchangeActiveSync®HTC Explorer syncs your work contacts from the MicrosoftExchange ActiveSync Server in your workplace.Transfer Use the Transfer app to transfer not only your contacts, but alsocalendar events and text messages from your old phone toHTC Explorer.16 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Home screenYour Home screen is where you make HTC Explorer your own. It comes with aShortcuts & Clock widget that contains shortcuts to your favorite apps and shows thetime and weather in your city. You can also add your favorite applications, shortcuts,folders and widgets so they’re always just a tap away. To find out how, see Personalizing on page 28.Extended Home screenAs you start to do more things with HTC Explorer, you might find that one Homescreen is not enough. No problem. You can use up to six extra screens. It should beplenty.Slide your finger horizontally to the left or right and you’ll discover more space foradding icons, widgets, and more. Press to return to the main Home screen (that is, the center home screen).17 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using Leap viewTo jump straight to the screen that you want, press or pinch the screen to showthe Leap view. It reveals all seven Home screens as thumbnails.Just tap the one you want and you’ll leap right there.18 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
BasicsAdjusting the volumeAdjusting the ringer volume changes the volume level of the ringtone, while adjustingthe media volume changes the volume level of sound notifications and music or videoplayback.Adjusting the ringer volume§Press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN button to adjust the ringer volume toyour desired level. The Ringer volume window appears on the screen to displaythe volume levels.§While in the lowest ringer volume level (Silent mode), press VOLUME DOWNonce to switch to Vibrate mode. The vibrate mode icon appears in the statusbar.§While in Vibrate mode, press VOLUME UP once to switch to silent mode. Thespeaker mute icon displays in the status bar.Adjusting the media volumeWhen playing music or watching video, press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWNbutton to adjust the volume. The Media volume window appears on the screen todisplay the volume level.Adjusting the earpiece volume for callsDuring a call, press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN button.Adjusting the volume via settings1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Sound > Volume.2. Drag the volume sliders to the left or right to adjust the volume levels of theringtone, media playback, alarms, and notifications. A sample tone is brieflyplayed with the volume being adjusted as you drag a slider.3. If you want the same volume for your ringtone and notifications, select Useincoming call volume for notifications.4. When you’re done, tap OK.19 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Sleep modeSleep mode saves battery power by putting HTC Explorer into a low power statewhile the display is off. It also stops accidental button presses when HTC Explorer is inyour bag. You’ll still receive messages and calls though.Switching to Sleep modeBriefly press the POWER button to turn off the display and switch to Sleep mode.HTC Explorer also automatically goes into Sleep mode when it’s idle for a while.Waking up from Sleep modeTo wake HTC Explorer up manually, press the POWER button. You’ll need to unlockthe screen.HTC Explorer automatically wakes up when you have an incoming call.Unlocking the screenPull the ring up to unlock the screen. If you have set up a screen unlock pattern, pin, or password, you will be asked todraw the pattern on the screen or enter the PIN or password before it unlocks.If you've set an event reminder or an alarm, you can drag or to the ring tosnooze or dismiss the event or alarm.20 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Opening an app from the lock screenOn the lock screen, drag an app icon to the ring to unlock the screen and directly goto the app. You can customize the lock screen in Settings > Personalize > Lock screenshortcuts to show your four favorite apps.Status and notificationsStatus iconsHere’s what each icon means:Signal strength Battery is fullGPRS connected Battery is chargingGPRS in use Battery is low (20% remaining)EDGE connected Battery is very low (10% or lessremaining)EDGE in use Silent mode3G connected Vibrate mode3G in use Microphone is muteHSDPA connected Speakerphone is onHSDPA in use Wired microphone headsetconnectedRoaming Wired headset connectedNo signal Bluetooth is on21 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
No SIM card installed Connected to a Bluetooth deviceConnected to a Wi-Fi® network Airplane modeData synchronizing GPS is onNetwork sharing is on Alarm is setNotification iconsNotification icons on the status bar make it easy for you to keep on top of yourmessages, calendar events, and alarms.Here’s what each one means:New Gmail message General notificationNew Microsoft ExchangeActiveSync or POP3/IMAP email Call in progressProblem with email delivery Missed callNew SMS/MMS Call on holdProblem with SMS/MMS delivery Call forwarding onNew Google Talk™ instantmessage Message forwarding onNew voicemail HTC Explorer is connected to acomputer via USB cableUpcoming event Wi-Fi is on and wireless networksare availableNew updates from your socialnetworksMatched contacts suggestion Uploading data (animated)22 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Bluetooth pairing request Downloading data (animated)HTC Explorer software updateavailable Waiting to uploadSong is playing Downloaded Android Market appinstalled successfullyFM Radio app in use Update available for an appdownloaded from Android MarketVoice recording is on Blank cardMore (not displayed) notifications Internal storage is lowNotifications panelWhen you get a new notification, you can open the Notifications panel to see whatevent notification or new information you've received. The Notifications panel lets youquickly switch between recently-opened apps, and also lets you easily turn on settingssuch as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth.To open the Notifications panel, press and hold the status bar, then slide your fingerdownward.If you have several notifications, you can scroll downthe screen to see them all.You can also open the Notifications panel on the Home screen by pressing andthen tapping Notifications.23 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Switching between recently opened appsOn the Notifications panel, you can easily access up to eight apps you just recentlyopened.1. Press and hold the status bar, then slide your finger downward to open theNotifications panel.2. In the Recent apps section, slide your finger left or right to see recently-openedapps. 3. Tap an app to open it.Press and hold to view recently used apps.Using Quick SettingsThe Quick Settings tab lets you easily turn on Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and more, and alsoprovides a quick shortcut to all HTC Explorer settings.1. Press and hold the status bar, then slide your finger downward to open theNotifications panel.2. Tap the Quick Settings tab.3. Tap the check box next to an item to turn it off or on. Closing the Notifications panelPress and hold the bottom bar of the Notifications panel, then slide your finger up thescreen. Or just press .24 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Connecting HTC Explorer to a computerWhenever you connect HTC Explorer to a computer using the USB cable, the Choosea connection type screen opens and lets you choose the type of USB connection.Select one of the following choices, and then tap Done:Charge only Select this option if you only want to charge the battery whileconnected to your computer.Disk drive This mode is available only when there’s a storage card installed onHTC Explorer. Select this mode when you want to copy files betweenthe storage card and your computer.When Disk drive mode is enabled while HTC Explorer is connected tothe computer, you will not be able to use apps on HTC Explorer toaccess the storage card.HTC Sync Select this option to synchronize contacts, calendar, and otherinformation between your computer and HTC Explorer.USBtetheringWhen you do not have an Internet connection on your computer, youcan select this mode to share the mobile data connection ofHTC Explorer with your computer.Internet pass-throughIf you don’t have a data plan or you don’t have access to a Wi-Finetwork, you can select this mode to share your computer’s Internetconnection with HTC Explorer.Copying files to or from the storage cardYou can copy your music, photos, and other files to the storage card.1. Connect HTC Explorer to your computer using the supplied USB cable.2. On the Choose a connection type screen, select Disk drive, and then tap Done.On your computer, the storage card is recognized as a removable disk.3. Navigate to the removable disk and open it.4. Do one of the following:§Copy the files from the computer to the storage card’s root folder.§Copy the files from the storage card to a folder in your computer.5. After copying the files, unmount the removable disk (that is, the connectedHTC Explorer) as required by your computer’s operating system to safelyremove HTC Explorer.6. Do one of the following:§Disconnect HTC Explorer from the computer.§If you want to keep HTC Explorer connected to the computer but want it tobe able to access the storage card, open the Notifications panel, tap Diskdrive, select an option except Disk drive, and then tap Done.25 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Copying text, looking up information, andsharingIn apps such as the web browser and Mail, you can select text and choose what youwant to do with it.Selecting text1. Press and hold on a word.2. Drag the start and end markers to highlight the surrounding text you want toselect. To copy the address of a linked web page, press and hold the link, and then tapCopy link URL.Copying and pasting text1. After you have selected the text you want to copy, tap Copy. The selected text is then copied to the clipboard.2. In a text entry field (for example while composing an email), press and hold atthe point where you want to paste the text.3. Tap Paste.Searching or translating text1. After you have selected the text you want to search for or translate, tap .2. Tap one of the following tabs:Google SearchLook for related information using Google Search, based on the text thatyou selected.WikipediaLook for related information on Wikipedia®, based on the text that youselected.26 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
YouTubeLook for videos on YouTube®, based on the text that you selected.Google TranslateTranslate the text to another language.Sharing text1. After you have selected the text you want to share, tap .2. Choose where to paste and share the selected text, such as in an email messageor Facebook status update.27 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
PersonalizingMaking HTC Explorer truly yoursMake HTC Explorer look and sound just the way you want it. Personalize it with adifferent wallpaper, skin, ringtone, and notification sound for events such as incomingtext, email, and calendar reminders.On the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize to get started.Personalizing HTC Explorer with scenesHTC Explorer becomes multiple phones in one when you use scenes. Scenes arepersonalized Home screen layouts that you can quickly apply. By switching betweenscenes, you instantly turn HTC Explorer into your perfect weekend phone, travelphone, work phone, or pure play phone.Everytime you add or modify something on the Home screen, HTC Explorerautomatically saves your changes to the current scene selected.Using a preset sceneHTC Explorer features preset scenes, each preconfigured with a different wallpaperand collection of widgets that reflect different moments in your life. You can choose ascene that is suitable for work, play, travel, or your social life.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the scene you want.4. Tap Apply.To download more scenes, press , and then tap Personalize . On the Display tab,tap Scene > Get more.Creating a new sceneYou’ll start with an empty Home screen when you create a new scene.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.3. Press , and then tap New.28 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Enter a new scene name, then tap Done.5. Personalize the scene by adding widgets and other elements, arranging theHome screen layout, and changing the skin or wallpaper. All of your changes willbe automatically saved to this scene.Renaming a scene1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the scene you want torename.4. Press and hold a scene thumbnail, then tap Rename.5. Enter a new scene name, then tap Done.Deleting scenes1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Scene3. Press , and then tap Delete.4. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to browse through scenes, thentap one or more scenes you want to delete.5. Tap Delete.Changing your wallpaperPersonalizing your wallpaper with your favorite photo is a quick and easy way to giveHTC Explorer a fresh look. Browse the collection of wallpapers included inHTC Explorer or choose from photos that you have taken with the camera. You canalso change your Home screen to use an animated wallpaper.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Wallpaper.3. Tap one of the following:HTC wallpapers Choose a preset wallpaper, then tap Preview > Apply.Live wallpapers Choose from preset animated wallpapers. Tap Preview toview the animation, and then tap Apply.Gallery Choose an existing photo. Crop the photo and then tap Save.To download more wallpapers, press , and then tap Personalize . On the Displaytab, tap Wallpaper > HTC wallpapers > Get more.29 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Applying a new skinPersonalize beyond the Home screen by applying a new skin. Skins are set to give adifferent look and feel to most onscreen buttons, application screens, option menus,and other items.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Skin.3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the skin you want.4. Tap Apply.To download more skins, press , and then tap Personalize . On the Display tab,tap Skin > Get more.Personalizing your Home screen with widgetsWidgets put at-a-glance important information and media content up front on yourHome screen. Some widgets are already added to your Home screen for yourconvenience. You can add more from the available selections of widgets.Adding a widget to your Home screen1. Go to a part of the Home screen where there’s space to add a new widget.2. Press , and then tap Personalize.3. On the Add to home tab, tap Widget.4. Select a widget that you want.5. Most HTC widgets are available in a variety of designs and sizes to suit yourneeds. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to view the differentstyles, and then tap Select to choose one.You can also add widgets that allow you to quickly switch on or off certain settingssuch as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. Scroll down the widgets list, tap Settings, and then tapthe widget that you want.To download more widgets, press , and then tap Personalize. On the Add toHome tab, tap Widget > Get more HTC widgets.30 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Changing the settings of a widgetYou can modify basic settings of some widgets (for example, the People and Mailwidgets) from the Home screen.1. Press and hold a widget on the Home screen. HTC Explorer vibrates and you’llsee a colored box around the widget. Don’t lift your finger just yet.2. Drag the widget to . The relevant screen where you can change some settings for this widget thenopens.3. Customize the widget settings.Adding icons and other shortcuts on yourHome screenPlace app icons on your Home screen to open apps quicker. You can also addshortcuts to settings and specific information such as a bookmarked webpage,someone’s phone number, a music playlist, route directions, and many other items, toyour Home screen.The shortcuts available depend on the apps that are installed on HTC Explorer.1. Go to a Home screen where there’s space to add a new icon or shortcut.2. Press , and then tap Personalize.3. On the Add to Home tab, tap App to add an app icon, or Shortcut to add ashortcut to a setting or information.To add an app icon on the Home screen, tap , and then press and hold an appicon. Without lifting your finger, drag the icon to an empty area on the Homescreen, and then release it.31 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Adding folders on your Home screenUse folders to group related apps and other shortcuts to keep your Home screen tidyand organized. You can also add information folders that show up-to-date informationsuch as Bluetooth received files, your Facebook phonebook, and more.Creating a new folder and adding items to it1. Go to a part of the Home screen where there’s space to add a new folder.2. Press , and then tap Personalize.3. On the Add to home tab, tap Folder.4. Tap New Folder. The new folder appears on the Home screen.5. Go to the Home screen where there is an app, icon, or shortcut, and then pressand hold it. HTC Explorer then vibrates. Don’t lift your finger just yet.6. Drag the app, icon, or shortcut and drop it on the folder.Simply tap the folder to open it so you can access theapps and shortcuts inside the folder.Renaming a folder1. Tap the folder to open it.2. Press and hold the folder window’s title bar.3. Enter a new folder name and then tap OK.Rearranging or removing widgets and icons onyour Home screenRearrange the widgets and icons on your Home screen to make room for adding moreitems. You can also remove widgets and icons that you don’t frequently use.Moving a widget or icon1. Press and hold the widget or icon you want to move. HTC Explorer vibrates andyou’ll see a colored box around the widget or icon. Don’t lift your finger just yet.2. Drag the widget or icon to a new location on the screen. §You can pause at the left or right edge of the screen to drag the widget or icononto another Home screen panel.§When you drag an icon to a spot that’s occupied by another icon, the occupantautomatically moves away to give room.3. When the widget or icon is where you want it, lift your finger.32 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Removing a widget or icon1. Press and hold the widget or icon you want to remove. HTC Explorer vibratesand you'll see a colored box around the widget or icon. Don’t lift your finger justyet.2. Drag the widget or icon to .3. When the widget or icon also turns red, lift your finger.Rearranging the Home screenReorder your Home screen panels in any way that fits how you use them. Forexample, move the panels with frequently-used widgets, shortcuts, and folders closerto the main Home screen.The main Home screen is the panel that is bordered by a thin line in Leap view.1. Pinch the Home screen to show the Leap view.2. Press and hold the thumbnail of the home screen you want to move.HTC Explorer then vibrates. Don’t lift your finger just yet.3. Drag the thumbnail to its new position, and then lift your finger. Customizing the shortcuts on the lock screenYou can choose what shortcuts you want for your lock screen so you can unlock thescreen straight into your favorite app.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Lock screen > Choose lock screen shortcuts.33 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap a shortcut that you want to change, and then choose another app toreplace it .4. Tap Done.Using sound setsEach sound set gives you a different combination of sounds for your ringtone andnotifications such as incoming messages, email, calendar event reminders, and more.By switching between sound sets, you can instantly make HTC Explorer ring or alertyou with fun sounds when you're out with friends or change to subtle sounds whileyou're at work.Choosing a preset sound set1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound sets screen, and then tap a sound set name.3. You can tap to listen to the different sounds for that sound set.4. Tap Apply.To download more sound sets, press , and then tap Personalize . On the Soundtab, tap Sound set > Get more.Creating a sound set1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.3. Tap 4. Enter a new sound set name, and then tap Done.The newly created sound set is then added to the list of sound sets. You can assigndifferent tones to the sound set to your preference.Changing your ringtone, notifications, and soundsChange your ringtone, notification sounds, and alarms to suit your mood or lifestyle.Choose different sounds from the preset selection or your storage card.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.34 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Choose a sound set you want to customize or create a new one, and then tapApply.4. Change the ringtone, notification sound, and alarm from the Personalize screen. You can also go to the Messages, Mail, and Calendar apps to choose sounds fornew messages, email, and calendar reminders respectively.HTC Explorer automatically saves your choices to the current sound set.Deleting sound sets1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.3. Press , and then tap Delete.4. Tap one or more sound sets you want to delete.5. Tap Delete.Rearranging or hiding application tabsYou can rearrange the tabs of some apps to prioritize the types of information youfrequently use or remove the tabs you don’t really need.1. Open an app that has the usual tabs at the bottom of its screen. 2. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you the area whereyou can rearrange icons, lift your finger.3. Do any of the following:Add a tab Press and hold a tab that you want to add, and then drag itbeside the other tabs.Move a tab Press and hold the tab you want to move, and then drag it to itsnew position.Remove a tab Press and hold a tab you want to hide, then drag it up.4. When you’re done, press .Adding a tab back1. Open the app from which you previously removed some tabs.2. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you some of yourhidden tabs, lift your finger.35 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Press and hold the tab you want to show, then drag it down to where you wantto position it again. 4. When you’re done, press .Shortcuts & Clock widgetOpen often-used apps or preview their contents right from the Home screen.From the Shortcuts & Clock widget, you can:§Tap the shortcut to an app to open it§Tap the information bar to extend it and view the contents of that app§Tap the preview of the content and open it36 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Customizing the Shortcuts & Clock widgetYou can choose which shortcuts and city appear on the Shortcuts & Clock widget.1. On the Home screen, tap and hold the Shortcuts & Clock widget. Don't lift yourfinger just yet.2. Drag the widget to .3. From this screen, you can:§Tap a shortcut slot, and then choose an app or shortcut to assign to it.§Tap the time, and then select a city that will appear in the widget. If yourcity is not included in the list, tap to add your city.4. Tap Done.The Shortcuts & Clock widget is updated.37 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Phone callsDifferent ways of making callsBesides making calls from the phone dialer screen on HTC Explorer, you can tap anumber in a text message or email to call, or press a single number on the phonedialer to quickly call a contact.Most SIM cards come with a PIN (personal identification number) set by yourmobile operator. If you’re asked for a PIN, enter it and then tap OK. If you enter thewrong PIN three times, your SIM card is blocked. Don't worry. Just contact yourmobile operator and ask for the PUK (PIN Unblocking Key).Making a call on the Phone dialer screenYou can either dial a number directly, or use the Smart dial feature to search and call astored contact or a number from your call history.1. On the Home screen, tap .2. Begin entering the first few digits of a phone number or characters of a contactname on the phone keypad. The Phone dialer screen then displays a list ofmatching numbers and names.If you enter a wrong digit or letter, tap to delete it. To erase the entire entry,press and hold .3. Slide your finger up on the filtered list to close the phone keypad and see ifthere are more matching numbers or contacts. 4. To place a call, do one of the following:§Tap a phone number or contact from the list.§After entering a complete number, tap Call.§To call a different phone number associated with the contact, you can tap at the right side of the contact name. On the contact details screen, tapthe number you want to call.While dialing or when the call is in progress, the status bar displays the call in progressicon .38 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
What is Smart dial?The phone dialer’s Smart dial feature makes it quick and easy for you to place a call.Simply enter the phone number or first few letters of the person’s name you want tocall. Smart dial automatically searches and filters your stored contacts and the phonenumbers from the call history.Using Speed dialUse Speed dial to call a phone number with a single tap. For example, if you assign acontact’s number to the number 2 key, you can just press and hold 2 to dial thenumber.The number 1 key is generally reserved for your voicemail. Press and hold this keyto call voicemail and retrieve your voicemail messages.Assigning a speed dial key1. On the Home screen, tap Phone.2. Press , and then tap Speed dial > .3. Enter the name of the contact you want to add. When the name comes up inthe list, tap the name.4. On the Speed dial screen, choose the phone number of the contact to use, and aspeed dial key to assign.5. Tap Save.You can also set a speed dial key in People. Tap a contact, press , and thenselect Set speed dial (or More > Set speed dial).39 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Calling a phone number in a text message1. Tap the phone number within the message. 2. Tap Call. To call the message sender, tap the received message, and then tap Call on theoptions menu.Calling a phone number in an emailWant to call a number that's in an email? No problem.1. In the email body, tap the phone number.2. Edit the number if necessary.3. Tap Call.Calling a phone number in a Calendar eventTapping a phone number in a Calendar event lets you see the event details such asconference call ID number or meeting PIN code while on the Phone dialer screen.1. Open an event in Calendar.2. On the Event details screen, tap the phone number.3. Tap Call.Making an emergency callIn some regions, you can make emergency calls from HTC Explorer even if you don’thave a SIM card installed or your SIM card has been blocked.1. On the Home screen, tap .2. Dial the emergency number for your locale, and then tap Call.If you’ve enabled but forgotten your lock password or lock pattern, you can still makeemergency calls by tapping Emergency call on the screen.40 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Receiving callsWhen you receive a phone call from a contact, the Incoming call screen appears.You can use the polite ringer and pocket mode features for receiving calls. To findout how, see Changing sound settings on page 166.Answering a callDo one of the following:§Tap Answer.§If the display is off when you get a call, the Lock screen appears. Drag to thering to unlock the screen and answer the call.Rejecting a callDo one of the following:§Tap Decline.§If the display is off when you get a call, the Lock screen appears. Drag to thering on the Lock screen.§Press the POWER button twice to reject a call.Muting the ringing sound without rejecting the callDo one of the following:§Press the VOLUME DOWN or VOLUME UP button.§Press the POWER button.§Place HTC Explorer face down on a level surface.If HTC Explorer is already facing down, it will still ring when there are subsequentincoming calls.41 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
HTC Caller IDEverytime you make a call or your friend gives you a ring, you get to see your friend’slatest status update from social networks like Facebook or Twitter™ right on the callscreen. You also won’t miss people’s birthdays. You’ll see a birthday reminder, if yourfriend’s birthday will occur sometime within the next seven days.What can I do during a call?When a call is in progress, use the buttons onscreen to mute or unmute themicrophone or to turn the speakerphone on or off. You can also press and choosewhether to add a call, place the call on hold, mute the microphone, and more.Putting a call on hold1. Press and then tap Hold to put the call on hold. When you put a call on hold,the status bar displays the hold call icon .2. Press , and then tap Unhold to resume the call.Switching between callsIf you’re already on a call and accept another call, you can choose to switch betweenthe two calls.1. When you receive another call, tap Answer to accept the second call and putthe first call on hold.2. To switch between the calls, tap the person you want to talk to on the screen. 3. To end the current call and return to the other call, tap End call.42 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Turning the speakerphone on during a callTo decrease potential damage to your hearing, do not hold HTC Explorer againstyour ear when the speakerphone is on.Do one of the following:§Flip HTC Explorer over during a call (be sure that Flip for speaker is selected in > > Settings > Sound).§On the call screen, tap .The speakerphone icon appears in the status bar when the speakerphone is on.To turn the speakerphone off, just flip HTC Explorer over again, facing it up. Or tap again.Muting the microphone during a callOn the call screen, tap to toggle between turning the microphone on or off.When the microphone is turned off, the mute icon appears in the status bar.Ending a callDo one of the following to end the call:§On the call screen, tap End call.If the display is off, press POWER to turn on the screen so you can tap End call.§Slide open the Notifications panel, then tap .If the phone number of the person who called is not in your contacts list, you canchoose to save the number to your contacts list after you hang up.Setting up a conference callConference calling with your friends, family, or co-workers is easy. Make the first call(or accept a call), and then simply dial each subsequent call to add it to theconference.Make sure your SIM card is enabled with conference calling service. Contact yourmobile operator for details.1. Make a call to the first conference call participant.2. When connected, press , tap Add call, and then dial the number of thesecond participant. The first participant is put on hold when you dial the secondparticipant.3. When connected to the second participant, tap merge .43 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. To add another participant to the conference call, tap on the conference callscreen, and then dial the number of the contact you want to invite to theconference call.5. When connected, tap to add the participant to the conference call.6. To talk to a person in the conference call in private, tap and then selectPrivate call on the options menu.To end the call with a participant, tap and then tap Finish this call on the optionsmenu.To end the conference call, tap End call.Internet callsWhen you're connected to a Wi-Fi network, you can make and receive calls throughan Internet calling account.Before you add an Internet calling account, make sure that you've registered withan Internet calling service that supports voice calls over Session Initiation Protocol(SIP). Internet calls to phone numbers may incur additional fees.Adding an Internet calling account1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Call.2. Under Internet call settings, tap Accounts.3. Tap Add account.4. Enter your account details.5. Press to save your account.6. To set HTC Explorer to receive Internet calls on your added account, tap theReceive incoming calls check box.Making an Internet callMake an Internet call to either your contact's Internet calling account or phonenumber.Call any of the following:Internetcallingaccount§In People, tap a contact who has an Internet calling account, and thentap Internet call.§In Call History, tap an Internet call log.PhonenumberSee Different ways of making calls on page 38. But first, setHTC Explorer to use Internet calling for your outgoing calls. From theHome screen, press , and then tap Settings > Call. Tap Use Internetcalling, and then select either For all calls or Ask for each call.44 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using Call historyUse Call History to check missed calls, your dialed numbers, and received calls.Checking a missed callYou will see the missed call icon in the status bar when you miss a call.1. Slide open the Notifications panel to check who the caller is.2. To return the call, tap the missed call notification. Then tap the caller’s name ornumber on the Call History screen.Checking calls in the Call History1. On the Home screen, tap .2. Slide to the Call History tab.3. On the Call History screen, you can:§Tap a name or number in the list to call.§Press and hold a name or number in the list to display the options menu.§Tap to check only the call history of a particular contact.§Press , then tap View to display just a particular type of calls such asmissed calls or outgoing calls.Adding a new phone number to your contacts from Call History1. On the Call History screen, press and hold the phone number that you want tosave, and then tap Save to People.2. Choose whether to create a new contact or save the number to an existingcontact on HTC Explorer.3. Do any of the following:§When creating a new contact, enter the contact name, contact type, andother information in the blank contact record that appears. The phonenumber is automatically added to the mobile field in the phone section. Tostore it as another type of number, for example a home number, tap theMobile button.§When saving the number to an existing contact, tap a contact stored onHTC Explorer, and then select the number type.4. Tap Save.45 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Clearing the Call History listOn the Call History screen, do one of the following:Remove one name ornumberPress and hold the name or number, and then tap Deletefrom call history.Clear the entire list Press , and then tap Remove call history. Tap Select all> Delete.Using Home dialingWhen you're on a trip abroad, it's easy to dial friends and family from home. Yourhome country code is automatically added when you make calls to your contacts onHTC Explorer while roaming.HTC Explorer dials normally when entering phone numbers that are not saved inPeople. If you want to call an unsaved phone number in your country, you still needto enter a plus (+) sign and country code before the phone number.1. On the Home screen, tap .2. Begin entering the first few digits of a phone number or characters of a contactname on the phone keypad.3. Tap a phone number or contact from the contact list. HTC Explorer then dialsthe number with your home country code.Changing the default country code for Home dialing1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Call > Phone settings > Home dialing settings.3. Choose the country that you want from the country code dropdown list.4. Tap OK.Turning off Home dialingIf you prefer to manually enter complete phone numbers to call while roaming, youcan turn off Home dialing.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Call > Phone settings.2. Clear the Home dialing check box.46 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Call servicesHTC Explorer can directly link to the mobile phone network, and enable you to accessand change the settings of various phone services. Call services may include callforwarding, call waiting, voicemail, and more. Contact your mobile operator to find outabout the availability of call services.To open call services, press from the Home screen, and then tap Settings > Call.Fixed DialingNumbersRestrict outgoing calls to a fixed set of numbers. To enable thisfeature, you must know your SIM card’s PIN2 code.Voicemail service Shows the current voicemail service being used.Voicemail settings Specify another voicemail number aside from the one specifiedby your service provider.Clear voicemailnotificationIf you have a notification of a new voicemail, you can clear thenotification with this option.Phone settings Modify your phone settings such as automatic saving of anunknown contact number when a call with that number ends.Call forwarding Select how you want to handle busy, unanswered, andunreachable calls. You can also set the call forwarding optionfor all incoming calls.Call barringsettingsChoose whether to block various categories of incoming andoutgoing calls.Additional settings Enable or disable operator services such as caller ID and callwaiting.Cell broadcast Enable or disable receipt of cell broadcast messages.Cell broadcastsettingsConfigure channels and language for cell broadcast messages.Accounts Add, modify, or remove Internet calling accounts. You can alsochoose whether to receive incoming Internet calls.Use Internet calling Select whether to use Internet calling for all calls you make orfor Internet address calls only, or to be asked which you preferfor each call you make.47 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Turning Airplane mode on or offIn many countries, you are required by law to turn off wireless devices while on boardan aircraft. A way to turn off wireless functions quickly is to switch HTC Explorer toAirplane mode.When you enable Airplane mode, all wireless radios on HTC Explorer are turned off,including the call function, data services, Bluetooth, and Wi-Fi. When you disableAirplane mode, the call function is turned back on and the previous state of Bluetoothand Wi-Fi is restored.To turn Airplane mode on or off, press and hold POWER, and then tap Airplane mode.When enabled, the Airplane mode icon is displayed in the status bar.48 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Search and Web browserSearching HTC Explorer and the WebYou can search for information on HTC Explorer and on the Web by using GoogleSearch. Some applications, such as People or Mail, have their own search function,which you can use to search only within those applications.Setting search options1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Search > Google search.3. Choose the settings that you want.Show websuggestionsDisplay suggestions for Google web searches below thesearch box as you type.Use My Location Include your location in searches to get local searchresults.Search history Use suggestions from the web-based Google searchhistory, from your Google Account. Tap Manage searchhistory to view or manage the web search historyassociated with your Google Account on the web browser.4. Press .5. Tap Searchable items, and then select the items you want included when doinga search.Performing searches on the web and HTC Explorer1. From the Home screen, press .2. Enter the search item in the search box. As you type, matching items onHTC Explorer and suggestions from Google web search are shown as a list.3. Do one of the following§To narrow your search, tap , select another search location (for example,Apps), and then tap .§If what you’re searching for is in the list of suggestions, tap it in the list. Theitem opens in the appropriate application.§To edit an item in the list, tap . The item will appear in the search box,where you can edit it.§If what you’re searching for is not in the list, tap to search the web. Theweb browser opens, displaying the results of a Google search.49 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Quickly looking up information on the WebQuick Lookup helps you learn about something right on the spot. When you enter anew word or phrase, you can easily look it up in popular websites or search servicessuch as Google Search and Wikipedia.1. From the Home screen, tap > Quick Lookup.2. If the onscreen keyboard is open, press to close it first so you’ll see thebottom tabs.3. Slide across the tabs to pick where you want to look up information. Then in thesearch box, enter what you want to search for.4. Tap .After looking up the item on one tab, you can slide to other tabs to automaticallylook up the same term there.Translating words to other languages1. From the Home screen, tap > Quick Lookup.2. If the onscreen keyboard is open, press to close it first so you’ll see thebottom tabs.3. Slide to the Google Translate tab.4. Under From language, choose the original language, then enter the word orphrase you want to translate.5. Under To language, choose from the languages available for translation.6. Tap Translate.Using the web browserDo one of the following to open the web browser and start surfing the Web:§On the Home screen, tap Internet.§From the Home screen, tap > Internet.Going to a webpage1. On the browser screen, tap the URL box on top of the screen.2. Enter the webpage address using the keyboard. As you enter the address,matching webpage addresses will appear on the screen.3. Do one of the following:§Tap an address to go directly to that webpage.§Continue typing in the webpage address, then tap .50 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Changing the screen orientationTurn HTC Explorer sideways to display the web browser in landscape orientation.If the screen orientation doesn’t change automatically, turn on automatic screenorientation. From the Home screen, press , tap Settings > Display, and thenselect the Auto-rotate screen check box.Navigating and zooming on a webpage§You can swipe your finger on the screen to navigate and view other areas of thewebpage.§Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in, then tap the screen twice quickly againto zoom out. You can also use your fingers to spread or pinch the screen tozoom in and out.Selecting a link on a webpageYou can tap a link to open it, or press and hold a link for more options.Link What to doWebpageaddress(URLs)§Tap the link to open the webpage.§Press and hold the link to open a menu that allows you to open,bookmark, copy to the clipboard, or share the link.Email address §Tap to send an email message to the email address.§Press and hold, then tap Copy on the menu to copy the emailaddress to the clipboard. You can paste the email address laterwhen creating a new contact or sending a new email message.Selecting an address or phone number on a webpageOn a webpage, you can:§Tap an address to view the location on a map.§Tap a phone number to call.Opening a new browser windowOpen multiple browser windows to make it easier for you to switch from one websiteto another.1. While viewing a webpage, press and then tap Windows.2. Tap .A new browser window opens.51 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Switching between browser windows1. While viewing a webpage, do one of the following:§Press and then tap Windows.§Pinch the screen (zoom out) until you see the other browser windows.2. Slide your finger until the webpage you want to view appears. 3. Tap a webpage to display it in full screen. Tap to close a webpage.Downloading from the WebDo more than just browsing the Web. You can download files such as photos andmusic as well as apps using the web browser.Before downloading an app, check first its compatibility with HTC Explorer to makesure it can be installed.Downloading apps from the WebYou can download apps directly from your favorite websites. Apps downloaded fromthe Web can be from unknown sources. To protect HTC Explorer and your personaldata, we strongly recommend that you download and install only apps you trust.1. Open your web browser, then go to the website where you can download theapp you want.2. Follow the website's instructions for downloading the app.Before you can install the downloaded app, you need to set HTC Explorer to allowinstallation of third-party apps. From the Home screen, press , then tap Settings >Applications > Unknown sources.52 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Viewing your downloadsWhile viewing a webpage, press and then tap More > Downloads.Viewing bookmarks and previously visitedpagesYou can store as many bookmarks as you want on HTC Explorer. You can also accessa convenient list of the sites you have visited, or quickly view the pages that youaccess most often.Bookmarking a webpage1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Add > Add bookmark.2. To bookmark the web page under a certain category (such as sports or dining),tap Add tags and enter a tag name. This groups similar web pages so you caneasily locate them.3. Edit the bookmark name if needed, and then tap Done.Opening a bookmark1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. Do one of the following:§On the Bookmarks tab , navigate to the bookmark you want to open,and then tap it.§On the Tags tab , open a tag group, navigate to the bookmark you wantto open, and then tap it.Editing a bookmark1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the Bookmarks tab , press and then tap Edit.3. Tap at the right of the bookmark you want to edit.4. Enter your changes, and then tap Done.Viewing a previously visited page1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the History tab , navigate to the page you want to view and then tap thepage.Clearing the list of previously visited pages1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the History tab , press , and then tap Clear history.53 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Viewing a page that you often visit1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the Most visited tab , navigate to the page you want to view, and thentap the page.Clearing the list of most visited pages1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the Most visited tab , press , and then tap Clear all.Changing the view of bookmarks or most visited pages1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the Bookmarks tab or the Most visited tab , press , and then tapThumbnails, List, or Grid to change the view. For example, if you are in Thumbnails view and you want to view bookmarks ina grid, press and tap List, then press and tap Grid.Setting browser optionsCustomize the web browser to suit your browsing style. Set display, privacy, andsecurity options when using the web browser.From the browser screen, press , and then tap More > Settings.Setting your home page1. From the browser screen, press , and then tap More > Settings > Set homepage.2. Select the home page you want to use.Browsing full versions of all websitesSome websites display a mobile version of their pages on phone web browsers. Youcan choose to view the full version of all pages, even for these sites.From the browser screen, press , tap More > Settings, and then clear the Mobileview check box.54 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Choosing when to show Adobe Flash contentChoose which Adobe® Flash® content you want to see on a webpage, and when youwant to view it.1. From the browser screen, press , and then tap More > Settings > Enableplugins.2. Tap On demand.After selecting On demand, you can show the Adobe Flash content by tapping onthe webpage.55 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Accounts and syncAbout online accountsHTC Explorer can sync with your Facebook and email accounts.The information you can get includes:§Gmail, Exchange ActiveSync, and other POP3/IMAP email.§Google and Exchange ActiveSync contacts, as well as your friends’ contactinformation in Facebook.§Calendar events from your Google Account(s), from Exchange ActiveSync, andfrom your Facebook account.§Status updates and links shared by your friends and yourself on Facebook.§Facebook photo uploads.You can set up your Exchange ActiveSync and POP3/IMAP email accounts onHTC Explorer either in the Mail app or the Accounts & sync settings.Synchronizing with a Google AccountSigning in to your Google Account lets you sync Gmail and your Google contacts andcalendars between HTC Explorer and the Web. You also need to sign in to a GoogleAccount to use Google apps such as Google Talk and Android Market.If you skipped adding a Google Account when you first set up HTC Explorer, youmay encounter problems when using some Google apps. If these problems persist,you may need to factory reset HTC Explorer and enter your Google Account detailswhen you set up HTC Explorer again.Adding more Google AccountsYou can add more than one Google Account. However, subsequent Google Accountscan only sync contacts, emails, and calendar events. Other Google services use thefirst Google Account you added.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Tap Add account > Google.3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign in to an account or create a newaccount.56 Accounts and syncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Forgot your Google Account password?If you have forgotten your Google Account password, you can try to recover itby going to the Google website.1. On HTC Explorer or on your computer, open your web browser and goto https://www.google.com/accounts/ForgotPasswd.2. Enter the email address or username that you use to sign in to yourGoogle Account and click Submit.3. Follow the instructions on the screen to reset your password.If you don’t have an alternate email address or cannot access the emailaccount you used to create your Google Account, you can reset your GoogleAccount after 24 hours by answering the security question for passwordrecovery.Adding a social network accountIf you skipped signing in to your social network account (such as Facebook) whenyou first turned on and set up HTC Explorer, you can still add the account in thesettings.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Tap Add account, and then tap the account type you want to add.3. Follow the onscreen instructions to enter the account information.Your social network account is then added to the list on the Accounts & sync screen.Depending on how you configured the account, the new information may startsynchronizing with HTC Explorer.Managing your online accountsChanging general sync settings1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Select or clear the following:BackgrounddataIf this is selected, apps can send and receive online accountinformation even if you are not currently using them.Auto-sync If this is selected, apps can use the sync schedule defined inthe account settings. If this is cleared, you will need to syncaccounts manually.57 Accounts and syncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Synchronizing an account manually1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Tap the account that you want to sync.3. Tap Sync now.Changing account settingsYou can change settings such as the sync frequency and the types of informationsynchronized, the kinds of notification you receive, and the way that accountinformation is displayed.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. On the Accounts & sync screen, tap the account that you want to edit.3. Tap the type of information you want to sync or select an item to edit itssettings.Removing an accountYou can remove an account to delete it and all information associated with it fromHTC Explorer, for example email, contacts, or settings. Removing an account does notdelete information from the online service itself.You cannot remove some accounts, such as the first Google account you signedinto, except by deleting all personal information from HTC Explorer with a hardreset.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Tap the account that you want to remove.3. Tap Remove account, and then confirm that you want to remove the account.58 Accounts and syncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
PeopleTransferring contacts from your old phoneEasily transfer contacts from your old phone to HTC Explorer through Bluetooth.Depending on your old phone’s model, you may also transfer other types of data suchas calendar events and text messages to HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, tap > Transfer.2. Tap Next to begin.3. Choose your old phone's name and model.4. On your old phone, turn Bluetooth on and set it to discoverable mode.5. On HTC Explorer, tap Next to continue. HTC Explorer automatically turnsBluetooth on and searches for Bluetooth devices.6. From the device list, choose your old phone and then tap Next. HTC Explorerthen tries to pair with your old phone. You’ll see a security passkey on thescreen.7. On your old phone, enter this passkey or simply confirm it.8. Select the Contacts check box (and other supported types of data you want toimport), and then tap Next.9. When HTC Explorer finishes importing data, tap Done.59 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
About the People appWith the People app, easily manage your communications with your contacts viaphone, messaging, and email. You can also link your contacts to their social networkaccount such as Facebook to see their updates and events from the account all in oneplace.And that's not all. If you have the same contacts from different sources, People letsyou merge their contact information so you won't have duplicate entries in yourcontacts list.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Tap one of the following tabs:PhoneLaunches the Phone dialer screen.PeopleGives you access to all contacts on HTC Explorer, online accounts, andmore.GroupsLets you assign contacts to groups so you can easily send an SMS, MMS,or email message to a whole group.Call HistoryLists all your dialed numbers and received and missed calls.60 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Your contacts listThe People app lists all contacts stored on HTC Explorer and from the online accountsyou're logged in to. When you open People after you've just logged in to a newaccount, you'll be asked whether to add contacts from that account to your contactslist.Your contacts list also displays the contacts stored on your SIM card (usually markedwith the SIM card icon ).You can:§Open your profile and edit your own contactinformation.§Create, edit, or find contacts.§See status updates from friends in your socialnetwork account such as Facebook.§Tap a contact's name to open the contact detailsscreen for that contact.§See a notification icon such as when a contacthas sent you new messages or when it's thecontact's birthday.§Check out who's online in Google Talk. Onlinestatus icons are displayed if you’re signed in toGoogle Talk on HTC Explorer. For example, means the contact is available to chat.Filtering your contacts listYou can choose to only display contacts from particular account types (for example,Google contacts or Facebook contacts).1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the People tab, tap on the top bar to show a list of your online accounts.3. Choose the online accounts that contain the contacts you want to display inyour contacts list, and then press to save your selection.4. To set more options on sorting your contacts, press and then tap Settings.61 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting up your profileStore your personal contact information to easily send it to other people.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Do one of the following:§If you're logged in to any of your online accounts such as your GoogleAccount or Facebook for HTC Sense, tap your name or email address, andthen tap Edit my contact card.§If you're not logged in to your online accounts, tap Me, and then choosewhether to link your profile to an existing contact entry that alreadycontains your personal information or edit your profile.3. Enter or edit your name and contact details.4. Tap or your photo, and then choose whether to take your self-portrait or useanother photo for your profile.5. Tap Save.What you can see on your profileWhen you tap My profile, you'll see the following tabs:DetailsShows your own contact details. You'll also see your most recent posts in yoursocial network (such as Facebook if you're signed in to Facebook for HTCSense).From this tab, you can edit your profile or share it with others.Updates and eventsShows the updates and events that you've posted in your social network .GalleryShows your Facebook albums and photos.Importing contacts from your SIM cardWhen you import SIM contacts, you can either store them on HTC Explorer or addthem to your Google contacts or Exchange ActiveSync contacts, if you have set upthe relevant accounts.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Import/Export > Import from SIM card.3. If you have Google or Exchange ActiveSync accounts set up on HTC Explorer,tap the type for the imported contacts.62 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Do one of the following:§Tap one or more SIM contacts you want to import.§To import all contacts, tap Select all.5. Tap Save.Adding a new contact1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Tap .3. Tap the Name field, and then enter the contact name. Tap if you want to separately enter the contact's first, middle, and last name.Depending on the contact type, you may also be able to add a name prefix (such asMr. or Ms.) or a name suffix (such as Ph.D., Jr, or Sr).4. Select the Contact type, for example Google or Exchange ActiveSync. Thisdetermines which account the contact will sync with. Some fields may not be available when you’re adding contacts to your SIM card.5. Enter the contact information in the fields provided. Press if you want to close the onscreen keyboard first and easily scrollthrough the other fields.6. Tap Save.Searching for contactsIn addition to searching contacts by name or email address, you can set the Peopleapp to search by other criteria such as by their group name or company.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Settings > Search contacts by.3. Choose the types of criteria to search for, and then tap Done.When performing your search, simply enter the first few characters of the item you'relooking for in the search box. Matching contacts will then be listed.63 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Importing a contact from an ExchangeActiveSync accountYou can search for a work contact from your Exchange ActiveSync account, and thencopy it on HTC Explorer.You need to have your Exchange ActiveSync account set up on HTC Explorer first.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. In the search box, enter the first few letters of the contact's name or emailaddress.3. Tap . Under Company contacts, matching names are listed.4. Tap the name of the contact you want copied on HTC Explorer, and then tapSave to People.64 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Merging contact informationIf you have the same contacts on HTC Explorer, Google Account, and your socialnetwork account such as Facebook, HTC Explorer will try to combine themautomatically or let you decide which contacts to combine. Combining the samecontacts avoids duplicate entries in your contacts list.Accepting matched contacts suggestionsWhen HTC Explorer finds contacts that can be merged, you’ll see a link icon inthe notifications area of the status bar.1. Slide the Notifications panel down, and then tap Matched contacts suggestion.You'll see a list of suggested contacts to merge.2. To merge, tap .3. Tap OK.If you don’t want to merge any of your contacts, tap Dismiss all.Viewing a list of all your linked contacts1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Linked contacts (or More > Linked contacts). The Alllinked contacts screen then opens where you can see the account types andinformation merged.3. You can choose to break the link of an account type or relink.4. When you're done, tap OK.Manually merging contact information1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) you want to link.65 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap or (if there are suggested links).4. You can:§Under Suggest links, tap to link the contact to an account.§Under Add contact, tap one of the options to link to another contact.Breaking the link1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) whose link you want tobreak.3. Tap .4. Under the Linked contacts section, tap beside an account type to breakthe link.Backing up your contacts to the storage card1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Import/Export > Export to SD card.3. Select an account or type of contacts to export, then tap OK.Importing contacts from the storage cardYou can only import contacts that were exported to the storage card using theExport to SD card feature.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Import/Export > Import from SD card.3. If you have Google or Exchange ActiveSync accounts set up on HTC Explorer,tap the type for the imported contacts.Contact information and conversationsWhen you tap a contact on the People screen, the contact details screen opens,showing you the information you've stored or linked for that contact.The contact details screen has the following tabs:66 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
DetailsShows the information you have stored for the contact. Get in touch with thecontact directly by tapping any of the displayed methods. For example, if thecontact has a stored work phone number, tap Call work.ThreadShows SMS messages and emails you've received from the contact. It also listsall your incoming, outgoing, and missed calls to and from the contact.From this tab, you can reply to a message, send an email, or call the contact.UpdatesShows the contact’s updates and events from your social network account (forexample, Facebook).If you see a notification of the contact’s birthday under the Events section, youcan tap the notification and choose how you want to greet your contact, suchas to write on the person's Facebook wall.GalleryShows the linked contact’s Facebook albums and photos.Editing a contact’s information1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press and hold the contact, and then tap Edit contact. The contact details of your Facebook contacts cannot be edited.3. Enter the new information for the contact.4. Tap Save.Deleting contacts1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Delete.3. Select the contacts you want to remove, and then tap Delete.4. When prompted, tap OK.67 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Sending contact information as a vCardEasily share with others your own contact information or any contact fromHTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Do the any of the following:To send Do thisSomeone's contactinformationPress and hold the name of the contact (not the icon orphoto) whose contact information you want to send,and then tap Send contact as vCard.Your contactinformationPress and hold My profile, and then tap Send my profile.3. From the available options, choose how you want to send the vCard.4. Select the type of information you want to send, and then tap Send.Sending multiple contact cardsEasily share with others the contact information of several contacts from yourHTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Send contacts.3. Select the contacts whose contact information you want to share, and then tapSend. If you can't see the Send button while the onscreen keyboard is open, press toclose the keyboard.4. Choose how you want to send the contact cards:Bluetooth Tap Scan for devices, and then tap the device to which you want tosend the contact cards. Follow the onscreen messages onHTC Explorer and the other device to pair them and send the files.Mail Compose and send your email message, with the contact cardsattached.68 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Contact groupsAssign contacts to groups so you can easily send a message or email to a wholegroup. You can also sync groups on HTC Explorer with the groups in your Googleaccount, accessible via your computer’s web browser. We’ve also added the Frequentgroup as a special group type that automatically stores the contacts you dial or getcalls from the most.Creating a group1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Groups tab, tap .3. Enter a name for the group, and then tap .4. Select the contacts you want to add to the group, and then tap Save If your contacts list is long, you can use the search bar to search for contactsquickly, or press to hide the onscreen keyboard and scroll through the list.5. Tap to select a photo for the group.6. Tap Save.Editing a contact group1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Group tab, press and hold the group, and then tap Edit group.3. You can:§Tap the group name to change the name. You can only change the namefor groups that you have created.§Tap the icon to the left of the group name to change or remove the groupphoto.§To add contacts to the group, tap , select the contacts you want to add,and then tap Save.§To remove a contact from the group, tap the box beside the contact name.4. Tap Save.69 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Sending a message or email to a groupYou will be charged for each message sent. For example, if you send a message toa group of five people, you will be charged for five messages.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Group tab, tap the group you want to send a message or email to.3. Go to the Group action tab, and then do one of the following:§Tap Send group message to send a message to the group.§Tap Send group mail to send an email to the group.Rearranging your contact groups1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Groups tab, press , and then tap Edit group.3. Press and hold at the end of the group you want to move. When the row ishighlighted, drag it to its new position. 4. Tap Save.Rearranging the members of a contact group1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Groups tab, tap the group to see its members.3. Press , and then tap Edit group.4. Press and hold at the end of the contact’s name you want to move. Whenthe row is highlighted, drag it to its new position.5. Tap Save.70 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Deleting groupsYou can only delete groups that you have created.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Groups tab, you can:§Press and hold a group you want to delete, and then tap Delete group.§Press and then tap Edit groups to choose several contact groups toremove.Adding People widgetsStay in touch with different circles of friends or colleagues in your life. You can addseveral People widgets on the Home screen, with a different group of contacts oneach widget.1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Personalize.2. On the Add to home tab, tap Widget > People.3. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.4. Select the group you want to add as a widget.5. Repeat the above steps to add another People widget.Setting the default communication methodDepending on how you often reach your contacts, you can choose a differentcommunication method for each of the contacts on the People widget.1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.2. Tap a contact's name or status update (not the photo) on the widget to openthe person's contact details screen.71 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap Set default action, and then tap the communication method you want forthe contact.4. Press to return to the People widget on the Home screen.Changing the default communication method1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.2. Tap a contact's name or status update on the widget to open the person’scontact details screen.3. Tap Set default action.4. On the Select default action screen, tap the communication method you wantfor the contact.5. Press to return to the People widget on the Home screen.Getting in touch with a contact1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.2. Tap a contact's photo (not the name or status update) on the widget. Thedefault communication method you've set for this contact will be performed.On the People widget:§Tap a contact's name or status update to open the contact details screen for thatcontact.§Tap to open the People app and view all your contacts.Adding group members to a People widgetYou can add more members to the contact group that's on a People widget.§To add just one member, tap .§To add several members, tap .72 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
SocialFacebook for HTC SenseWith Facebook for HTC Sense, you can:§See all your Facebook contacts and their instant status updates in People.When you tap a contact in People, slide to theUpdates tab to see updates such as posted statusmessages, uploads, and profile changes.When there is a notification of the contact’sbirthday, you can tap the notification to send agreeting.§See Facebook photos right on the Gallery app.You can also upload one or more photos toFacebook, then tag and add captions that go withit.When you’re viewing the albums of a Facebookfriend, you can also share a link to a particularalbum, or comment on the album photos.§Check your friends’ Facebook status updates in Friend Stream™.§View your Facebook events and your friends’ birthdays on the Calendar app.73 SocialHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
§Signing in to your Facebook account from the Accounts & sync settings or theFacebook app (preinstalled or downloaded from Android Market) automaticallysigns you in to Facebook for HTC Sense.§You may need to authorize Facebook for HTC Sense to connect to your Facebookaccount.Enjoying Facebook in Friend StreamPost your status updates, write messages on your friends' Facebook walls, or shareyour location with your social network.Posting a message on a friend's Facebook wallQuickly write a wall post to your Facebook friends in Friend Stream.1. In Friend Stream, tap > Facebook.2. Tap > My wall, and then tap a friend from the list.3. Enter your message.4. Tap to attach a photo.5. Tap Post.Commenting on and liking Facebook postsTap someone’s status update on the All updates tab, and do any of the following: §Tap a photo or the album name shown in the statusupdate to view and comment on the album photosusing the Gallery app.§Tap Like to like the person’s status update.§Tap the text box, and then enter what you thinkabout the person’s status update.74 SocialHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Sharing your location with your Facebook friendsEating out in your fave restaurant? Tell your friends where you are and invite themalong.§You must be signed in to Facebook for HTC Sense to use this feature in FriendStream.§In order to find your location, you also need to enable location sources in Settings> Location.1. Go to the Locations tab, and then tap .2. Do any of the following:§Tap a place from the list.§Tap , type in your current location name and description, and then tapDone.3. Tap Check in.4. On the next screen, you can add your status message and even tag the friendsyou're with.5. When done, tap Check in.Chatting in Google TalkGoogle Talk is Google’s instant messaging program. It lets you communicate withother people that also use Google Talk. If you signed in to your Google Account whenyou first set up HTC Explorer, you are already signed in to Google Talk.To open Google Talk, on the Home screen tap > Talk.Chatting with a friend1. In Google Talk, tap a friend in the Friends list.2. Enter your message in the text box. You can also insert a smiley by pressing ,and then tapping More > Insert smiley.3. Tap Send.4. While chatting, press and then tap any of these options:Chat offrecordYour Google Talk messages are stored in the Chats folder ofyour Gmail account. Tap this option if you don’t want to storeyour chat messages.Switch chats If you have more than one chat going, tap to switch chat withanother friend.Friends list Return to the Friends list.75 SocialHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Add to chat Add another friend to your chat. The friend you invited andthe friend you're currently chatting will receive an invitation toa group chat. Each one who accepts the invitation joins thegroup chat.End chat End your current chat.More Clear the chat history, insert a smiley or view your friend’scontact details.Accepting a chat invitationWhen a friend sends you a Google Talk message, you receive a notification. Theirentry in the Friends list displays the message.Do one of the following:§In the Friends list, tap the friend who sent you the invitation to chat.§Open the Notifications panel, and then tap the chat notification.Changing your online status and picture1. In Google Talk's Friends list, tap your name to open the Set Status screen.2. Enter your new status message. Or press to choose a custom status fromthe list.3. Tap the online status beside your picture, and then select the status you wanton the menu.4. Tap your picture, and then do one of the following:§Tap Remove to remove your photo.§Tap Change to select another picture.5. Tap Done.Your online status, message, and picture appear in your contacts' Friends list and inother apps where your Google Talk status are displayed.76 SocialHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Adding and managing friendsThe Friends list is where you add and manage your friends in Google Talk.In Google Talk's Friends list, you can:Invite a friend 1. Press , and then tap Add friend.2. Enter the Google Talk instant messaging ID or Gmail address of thefriend you want to add.3. Tap Send invitation.View allfriendsInitially, only those friends that you often chat with — the mostpopular — are shown in the Friends list. To view all your friends,press , and then tap All friends. To view only friends that youoften chat with, press , and then tap Most popular.Make a friendpopular1. Press , and then tap All friends.2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then tap Always show friend.Block a friend You can block a friend from sending you messages. When blocked,your friend is removed from the Friends list and is added to theBlocked friends list.1. Press , and then tap All friends.2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then tap Block friend.Unblock afriend1. Press , and then tap More > Blocked.2. Tap the friend you want to unblock and then tap OK.View allinvited friendsPress , and then tap More > Invites. Friends who have not yetaccepted your invitation are listed on the screen.Changing settings or signing outIn Google Talk's Friends list, press and then tap:§Settings to change the app and notification settings.§Sign out to sign out.77 SocialHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
CameraCamera basicsWhether traveling for business or fun, enjoy taking photos and videos of your trip andencounters with HTC Explorer.§To open the camera in photo mode and take photos, tap from the Homescreen, and then tap Camera.§To open the camera directly in video mode so you can immediately startcapturing videos, tap from the Home screen, and then tap Camcorder.Viewfinder screenYou’ll find the following onscreen controls on the Viewfinder screen:Zoom bar Photo/Video mode switchShutter release/Record buttonEffects buttonGallery button78 CameraHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
ZoomingBefore taking a photo or video, you can first use the onscreen zoom bar to zoom in orout of your subject.Simply slide your finger up or down the zoom bar to zoom in or out. When you're recording video, the zoom bar is always shown onscreen. You can freelyzoom in or out while recording.Taking your closeup shotHaving a hard time taking your own closeup shot? With the camera, it's easy. Just setit to automatically take your self portrait. You won't even need to tap the shutterrelease button.1. Press to open the settings menu panel.2. Tap Self-portrait.3. Press to close the settings menu panel.4. Turn the camera to face you.Once the camera detects your face, it automatically focuses and takes your photo.Taking a photo1. From the Home screen, tap > Camera.2. Before taking the photo, you can zoom in or out first on your subject.3. Choose the resolution and other camera settings you want to use.4. Choose an effect to apply to your photo.5. Point the camera and focus on your subject.6. When you're ready to take the photo, tap .7. Choose what you want to do with the photo you’ve just taken.79 CameraHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Recording video1. From the Home screen, tap > Camcorder.2. Choose the video quality and other camera settings you want to use.3. Choose an effect to apply to your video.4. Frame your subject on the Viewfinder screen.5. Tap to start recording.6. You can freely zoom in or out while recording video.7. To stop recording, tap again.8. Choose what you want to do with the video you’ve just recorded.Adding effectsWant to make your photos look more interesting? Easy. Use the available cameraeffects to make your photos look like they’ve been taken through special lenses andfilters. You can also add certain effects to videos.Choose an effect first before you start taking a photo or video.1. Tap .2. Scroll through the available effects and tap one that you like.After capturingAfter capturing a photo or video, the Review screen will display the photo or thestarting image of the video that you have just captured. Tap the onscreen buttons tochoose what you want to do next.Delete the photo or videoSend the photo or video to your computer or another device using Bluetooth,send it by email, or select a social network where you want to upload it to.Choose how you want to use the photo, such as by setting it as your wallpaper.Watch the video.80 CameraHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Changing camera settingsOpen the menu panel to access and change camera settings.To open the camera settings, press .Self-portrait (photomode only)Select this option to take your own closeup shot.Self-timer (photo modeonly)Set a time delay before your camera automatically takesthe photo.Image adjustments Slide your finger across each of the slider bars to adjust theexposure, contrast, saturation, and sharpness.White balance White balance enables the camera to capture colors moreaccurately by adjusting to your current lightingenvironment.Resolution/VideoqualityChoose a photo or video resolution to use.ISO (photo mode only) Choose an ISO level or set it back to Auto. Higher ISOnumbers are better for taking pictures in low lightconditions.Review duration Set the time for a captured photo or video to be displayedon the Review screen before the camera changes back tothe Viewfinder screen.Widescreen (photomode only)When this check box is selected (default), photo resolutionsavailable for selection are in 3:2 ratio and you can use theentire Viewfinder screen to frame your subject. When notselected, photo resolutions available for selection are instandard 4:3 ratio.Geo-tag photos (photomode only)Select to store GPS location in your captured photos.Auto enhance (photomode only)Select to reduce noise when using a high ISO setting and toautomatically adjust photo brightness.Shutter sound Select to play a sound when you press the shutter releaseor record button.Grid (photo modeonly)Select to display a grid on the Viewfinder screen so you caneasily frame and center your subject before taking thephoto.Record with audio(video mode only)Select to record audio when capturing videos.Reset to default Change the camera settings back to default.81 CameraHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Photos, videos, and musicGalleryAbout the Gallery appRelive the fun while viewing photos and videos of your latest travels or your pet’snewest tricks. Get an audience by tagging your Facebook friends.To start using Gallery, check first if you have photos or videos copied onHTC Explorer.What’s more, you can edit and add effects to your photos. You can also easily use aphoto as your contact icon, location icon, or wallpaper.Selecting an albumFrom the Home screen, tap > Gallery. The Gallery app opens on the Albums screenwhere your photos and videos are organized by albums for easy viewing.82 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Viewing photos and videosAfter you’ve selected an album, you can browse through your photos and videos.Slide your finger up or down to scroll through the thumbnails. Tap a photo or video toview it in full screen. While viewing a photo in full screen, you can press , and then tap Show on mapto see the location where you took the photo. (Show on map is available whenyou've enabled Geo-tag photos in Camera.)Zooming in or out on a photoThere are two ways you can zoom in or out of a photo.§Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in, then tap the screen twice quickly againto zoom out.§Press your thumb and index finger on the screen and then spread your fingersapart to zoom in; pinch your fingers together to zoom out. Viewing photos as a slideshow1. Select an album that has the photos you want to view as a slideshow.2. Tap Slideshow. Tap the screen to show the playback controls.83 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Watching videosWhile browsing an album, tap a video to play it. Another way to easily get to your videos is to tap from the Homescreen, andthen tap Videos.§Use the onscreen controls to play, pause, or stop the video.§Tap More > Full screen or More > Best fit to toggle between full and best-fitscreens.Editing your photosDo basic editing tasks on your photos such as rotate and crop. You can also enhanceyour photos by applying effects such as high contrast, vintage, and more.Rotating a photo1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to rotate.3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap either Rotate left or Rotate right.Cropping a photo1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to crop.3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap Crop. You’ll see a crop boxaround the photo.4. To adjust the crop box size, press and hold the edge of the box. 84 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
5. When directional arrows appear, drag your finger inward or outward to resizethe crop box.6. To move the crop box to the part of the photo that you want to crop, drag thecrop box to the desired position.7. Tap Save to keep the changes.The cropped photo is saved as a copy. The original photo remains unedited.Adding effects1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to add effects to.3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap Effects. On the panel that opens,you’ll see options available to you.4. Tap an effect to apply on the photo.5. Tap Save to keep the changes.The enhanced photo is saved as a copy. The original photo remains unedited.Sending your photos and videosSend photos and videos via email or MMS to your computer or another device usingBluetooth.Sending photos or videos by emailYou can send several photos, videos, or both in an email message. They are added asfile attachments in your email.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap Gmail or Mail.4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.5. Compose your message and then tap (Gmail) or Send (Mail).If you selected Mail and you have multiple email accounts, the default emailaccount will be used.Sending a photo or video by MMS1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap Messages.85 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Tap the photo or video you want to send. The photo or video is automaticallyadded into the MMS message.5. To add another photo or video to your slideshow attachment, tap and thentap Picture or Video.6. Compose your message and then tap Send.Sending photos or videos using BluetoothYou can select several photos, videos, or both and send them to someone’s device oryour computer using Bluetooth.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap Bluetooth.4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer andconnect to the receiving Bluetooth device so the files can be sent.Sharing your photos and videos on the WebUsing the Gallery app, you can share photos and videos on your social networks. Andyou can post videos on YouTube.You can also use the Camera or Camcorder app to share a photo or video rightafter you’ve captured it.Sharing photos or videos on FacebookYou need to be logged in to your account to be able to upload photos or videos.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap Facebook for HTC Sense.4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.5. Select which album to upload to and set privacy settings for the uploadedphotos or videos.6. Tap Add tag and description, and then enter a different caption on each photoor video.7. To tag friends on your photos, tap Tag this photo. You can then tap the partwhere your friend is, and then select who you want to tag from the list. Repeatthis step to continue tagging friends.86 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
8. Slide to the left to go to the next photo or video. When finished adding tags anddescriptions, tap Done.9. Tap Done.Sharing photos on PicasaYou need to be signed in to a Google Account to be able to upload photos to thePicasa™ photo organizing service.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the photos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap Picasa.4. Select the photos you want to share and then tap Next.5. Enter a caption for the photos you're uploading.6. Select the online album where you want to upload the photos, or tap tocreate a new album.7. Tap Upload.Sharing videos on YouTubeYou can share your videos by uploading them to YouTube.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the videos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap YouTube.4. Select the videos you want to share and then tap Next. Sign in to your YouTubeor Google Account, if you’re asked to do so.5. Enter a title for the videos you're uploading.6. Tap More details where you can enter information such as description and tags,and select a privacy option.7. Tap Upload.87 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Viewing photos in your social networksRight in the Gallery app, check what you and your friends have uploaded to yoursocial networks.Viewing photos on FacebookYou need to be logged in to your Facebook account to view Facebook photos.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the Facebook tab.3. Tap your account name or your friend’s account on the list to view the photos inthe account.You can view photos in your online albums in the same way as you view photos onyour storage card.Commenting on photos in your social networksAdd comments to your uploaded photos as well as your friends’ photos.1. Do one of the following:§While browsing online albums, press and hold a photo and then tap Addcomment.§While viewing a photo in full screen, tap anywhere on the screen, and thentap .2. Tap the box that says “Write a comment.”3. Enter your text, and then tap Comment.88 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
MusicListening to musicEnjoy listening to songs and music on HTC Explorer using the Music app.You need to copy music files to your storage card first to use the Music app to playmusic.1. From the Home screen, tap > Music. The Music app opens in the Now playingscreen.2. Swipe your finger left or right across the screen to go to the next or previousmusic album.3. Tap the onscreen icons to control music playback, select a song to play, repeatsongs, and more.Turn shuffle on or off. (Shuffle is off whenbutton is gray.)Press and drag your finger across theprogress bar to jump to any part of thesong.Go to the library.Switch between showing the Now playinglist and Now playing screen. You canrearrange songs in the Now playing list.Cycle through the repeat modes: repeat allsongs, repeat current song, and don’trepeat.Playing music from the Lock screenWhen you’re listening to music and the screen turns off, press POWER to turn thescreen back on and control the music playback directly on the Lock screen.If you don’t see the playback controls on the Lock screen, swipe your finger from leftto right on the box onscreen.89 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
You can also pause music playback right from the Notifications panel.About the Music widgetYou can use the Music widget to play music right from your Home screen.Browsing music in the library1. Tap on the Music app’s Now playing screen or Now playing list to go to thelibrary. In the library, your music is organized by categories such as Artists andAlbums. Choose a category by tapping one of the tabs at the bottom of thescreen.2. Tap a song in a category to play it. The Now playing list is updated with thesong list from your selected category.You can add, remove, or rearrange the tabs in the library.Creating a playlistPersonalize your music experience by creating music playlists. Make a playlistcontaining just your favorite songs or create one to match your mood for the day.You can make as many playlists as you like.1. From the Home screen, tap > Music.2. Tap to go to the library.3. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlistscategory.4. Tap .5. Enter a playlist name, and then tap Add songs to playlist.6. Choose a category.90 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
7. Select the check boxes of songs you want to add to the playlist and then tapAdd.8. Tap Save.Playing the songs in a playlist1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlistscategory.2. Tap a playlist to open it.3. Tap the first song or any song in the playlist.When you tap a song in the list to play it, the Now playing screen is updated with thesongs from your playlist.Managing playlistsAfter creating a playlist, you can add more songs to it, rearrange their order, andmore.1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlistscategory.2. Tap a playlist to open it.3. Press , and then choose what you want to do:Add more songs toa playlist1. Tap Add songs.2. Go to the Songs category or any other category.3. Select the songs you want to add to the playlist andthen tap Add.Rearrange songs 1. Tap Change order.2. Press and hold at the end of the song title you wantto move. When the row is highlighted, drag it to its newposition, then release.Delete songs from aplaylist1. Tap Remove songs.2. Select the songs you want to delete and then tapRemove.Change playlistnameTap Rename playlist.Deleting playlists1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlistscategory.2. Press and then tap Delete playlists.3. Select the playlists to delete and then tap Delete.91 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting a song as a ringtoneYou can set a song from the Music app's library as your regular ringtone or asringtone for a certain contact.1. From the Home screen, tap > Music.2. Browse for the song that you want to set as a ringtone and then play it back.3. On the Now playing screen, press and then tap Set as ringtone (or More >Set as ringtone) .4. In the Set as ringtone options menu, tap Phone ringtone or Contact ringtone. Ifyou select Contact ringtone, you need to choose the contacts you want toassociate the song with in the next screen.Checking if the song was added as a ringtone1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. On the Settings screen, tap Sound > Phone ringtone.The song should be in the ringtone list and selected.Sharing music using BluetoothYou can choose a song from the Music app’s library and send it to someone’s deviceor your computer using Bluetooth.1. From the Home screen, tap > Music.2. Tap to go to the library.3. In the library, choose the song that you want to send via Bluetooth and thenplay it back.4. On the Now playing screen, press and then tap Share (or More > Share).5. Tap Bluetooth.In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer andconnect to the receiving Bluetooth device so the music can be sent.Finding music videos on YouTubeYou can find music videos of the song you’re listening to on YouTube. It’s simple. Onthe Now playing screen, just press and then tap Find videos.92 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Android Market and otherappsFinding and installing apps from AndroidMarketAndroid Market is the place to go to find new apps for HTC Explorer. Choose from awide variety of free and paid apps ranging from productivity apps, entertainment, togames.A Google Checkout™ payment method is required to purchase a paid app. You willbe asked to confirm method of payment when you purchase an app.Finding and installing an appWhen you install apps and use them on HTC Explorer, they may require access toyour personal information or access to certain functions or settings. Download andinstall only apps that you trust.Be cautious when downloading apps that have access to functions or a significantamount of your data on HTC Explorer. You’re responsible for the results of usingdownloaded apps.You need a Google Checkout™ account to purchase items on Android Market.1. From the Home screen, tap > Market.2. Do any of the following to find an app:Browse featuredappsScroll through the list of featured apps.Browse apps bycategoriesTap Apps or Games, and then tap a category. Under acategory, you can filter the apps by Top paid, Top freeor Just in.Search for an app Press , enter the name or type of app you’re lookingfor, and then tap .3. When you find the app that you like, tap it and read its description and userreviews.93 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. To download or purchase the app, tap FREE (for free apps) or the price buttonunder Buy (for paid apps).5. Tap OK to accept the permissions for the app and begin downloading andinstalling the app.You can uninstall an app for a refund within a limited time after your purchase. Toknow more about the refund policy for paid apps, please visit the Android MarketHelp site (http://market.android.com/support).Opening an installed appDo one of the following:§If you see this icon on the status bar, open the Notifications panel, and thentap the app.§From the Home screen, tap > Market. Press and then tap My apps. On theMy apps screen, tap the app, and then tap Open.§From the Home screen, tap . On the All apps screen, slide to the Downloadedtab, and then tap the app.Uninstalling an appYou can uninstall any app that you have downloaded and installed from AndroidMarket.1. From the Home screen, tap > Market.2. Press and then tap My apps.3. Tap the app you want to uninstall, and then tap Uninstall.4. When asked, tap OK.5. Choose the reason for removing the app, and then tap OK.Getting helpIf you need help or have questions about Android Market, press , and then tapHelp. The web browser will take you to the Android Market Help site.94 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using the ClockAbout the HTC Clock widgetUse the HTC Clock widget to see your current date, time, and location. You can alsouse the Clock to show the time in another city.Changing the location on the Clock widgetBy default, the Clock widget on the Home screen displays your current weather. Youcan customize the Clock widget on your Home screen to show the weather of anotherlocation.1. Press and hold the clock on the Home screen, and then drag it to the button.2. Tap the clock to change its settings.3. Choose a city. If you don't see the city that you want, tap to search for it and add it.4. Tap Done.Using the Clock appGet more from the Clock app than just the regular date and time. Use HTC Explorer asa desk clock complete with weather information or as a world clock so you can seewhat time it is in several cities across the globe. You can also use it as an alarm clock,stopwatch, and countdown timer.To open the Clock app, do one of the following:§Tap the Clock widget on the Home screen.§From the Home screen, tap and then tap Clock.Tap the tabs on the bottom row or slide your finger across the tabs to switchbetween the different functions of the Clock app.Using Desk ClockThe Desk Clock displays the current date, time, and weather. It also shows an alarmclock indicator.Tap the weather image or information to open the Weather app where you can seeweather forecasts for the next few days.Using World ClockUse the Clock app's World Clock tab to check the current time in several placesaround the globe. You can also set your home city, add more cities to the world clocklist, and manually set your time zone, date, and time.95 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting your home city1. On the World Clock tab, press and then tap Home settings.2. Enter your home city’s name. As you enter letters, the list is filtered to showmatching cities and countries.3. Scroll through the list and tap your home city.Setting the time zone, date, and timeTo set the time zone, date, and time on HTC Explorer manually, you need to turn offauto time sync first.1. On the World Clock tab, press and then tap Local time settings.2. Clear the Automatic check box, and then set the time zone, date, and time asrequired.From the Home screen, you can also press and then tap Settings > Date & timeto open the Date & time settings screen.Adding a city to the World Clock screenAdd more cities to the World Clock screen so you can instantly check the date andtime in these cities.1. On the World Clock tab, tap .2. Enter the city name you want to add. As you enter letters, the list is filtered toshow matching cities and countries.3. Scroll through the matching list and tap the city that you want to add.Setting an alarmYou can use the Clock app's Alarms tab to set up one or more wake-up alarms.1. On the Alarms tab, select the check box of an alarm and then tap that alarm.2. Under Set alarm, drag your finger up or down to roll the time scroll wheels andset the alarm time.96 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Choose from the available options. You can:§Enter the alarm Description and choose the Alarm sound to use.§Tap Repeat. Select which days of the week to sound the alarm, and thentap OK.§Select the Vibrate check box if you want HTC Explorer to also vibrate whenthe alarm goes off.4. After you've finished setting the alarm, tap Done.§To turn off an alarm, clear the check box of that alarm.§If you need to set more than three alarms, tap .Deleting an alarm1. On the Alarms tab, press and then tap Delete.2. Select the alarms you want to delete and then tap Delete.Changing alarm sound settingsOn the Alarms tab, press and then tap Settings. You can change the followingsettings:Alarm in silentmodeSelected by default, this option allows the alarm to sound evenwhen the volume is set to silent. Clear this check box if you want tosilence the alarm when HTC Explorer is in silent mode.Alarm volume Set the volume level that you want for the alarm.SnoozedurationSet how long to snooze between alarms.Side buttonbehaviorChoose what happens to the alarm when pressing the side button(VOLUME UP/VOLUME DOWN). You can set the button to snooze,dismiss the alarm, or disable the button. The side button works onlywhen the screen is not locked.97 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Checking WeatherUse the Weather app and widget to check the current weather and weather forecastsfor the next few days. In addition to your current location, you can view weatherforecasts for other cities around the globe. Your settings in the Weather app alsocontrol the weather information that is shown in the Clock and Calendar.For HTC Explorer to detect your current location and display your local weather inthe Weather app and widget as well as in Clock and Calendar:§You need to connect to the Internet.§Location services must be enabled. If you didn't enable it when you first set upHTC Explorer, you can do so in Settings > Location.1. From the Home screen, tap > Weather.2. Swipe your finger up or down the screen to check the weather in other cities.3. While viewing forecasts, you can:§Swipe your finger up or down the screen to check the weather in othercities.§Tap to update the weather information at any time.Adding a city to the Weather screenAdd more cities to the Weather screen so you can instantly check the weatherforecasts in these cities. In addition to your current location, the Weather screen candisplay up to fifteen cities.1. On the Weather screen, tap . Or press and then tap Add.2. Enter the location you want to add. As you type, the list is filtered to show thepossible locations based on the letters you entered.3. Tap the desired city to select it.Changing the order of cities on the Weather screen1. On the Weather screen, press and then tap Rearrange.2. Press and hold at the end of the item you want to move. When the row ishighlighted, drag it to its new position, then release.3. Tap Done.Deleting cities from the Weather screen1. On the Weather screen, press and then tap Delete.2. Select the cities you want to remove and then tap Delete.98 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Changing Weather options1. On the Weather screen, press and then tap Settings.2. You can change the following weather settings:Update when opened Select this check box to refresh weather updates everytime you open the Weather app.Update automatically Select this check box to automatically downloadweather updates.Update schedule Set an auto update schedule.Temperature scale Choose whether to display the temperature in Celsius orFahrenheit.Sound effects Choose whether to play sound effects related to theweather conditions.About the Weather widgetUse the Weather widget to instantly check weather forecasts of your current locationand other cities without having to open the Weather app. The Weather widget comesin different looks and styles.You can add this widget to the Home screen, if it’s not yet added.Watching videos on YouTubeUse the YouTube app to check out what’s popular on the online video-sharingwebsite.1. From the Home screen, tap > YouTube.2. Scroll through the list of videos, and then tap a video to watch it.3. While watching a video, you can:§Turn HTC Explorer sideways or double-tap the screen to watch the video infull screen.§Tap the video screen to pause, resume playback, or drag the slider to jumpto a different part of the video.§Tap a tab to learn more about the video, see related videos, or check outwhat other viewers think. You can also slide your finger across the tabs tosee if there are more items available.§Tap the thumbs-up or thumbs-down icon to add your video rating. TapMore to see other options.4. Press , and then tap Home to return to the YouTube main screen.99 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Searching for videos1. On the YouTube main screen, tap .2. Enter a search keyword, and then tap .3. Scroll through the results and tap a video to watch it. You also have the option to show results that were just recently posted. Tap Alltime, and then select a time period you want.Clearing the search history1. On the YouTube main screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Clear search history, and then tap OK when prompted.Sharing a video link1. On the video’s watch screen, tap More > Share.2. Choose how you want to share the video link from the available options.Capturing and sharing videos on YouTube1. From the Home screen, tap > YouTube. Or if YouTube is already open, return to its main screen.2. Tap .3. Tap to start capturing video.4. When you're finished capturing, tap again, and then tap Done.5. Enter a title for your video.6. Tap More details to select the YouTube account you want to use, add adescription, set the privacy level, and add tags or location information to yourvideo.7. Tap Upload.Listening to FM RadioTune in and listen to your favorite radio stations using the FM Radio app.You need to connect a headset first to the audio jack of HTC Explorer to use FMRadio. FM Radio uses the stereo headset as the FM radio antenna.From the Home screen, tap > FM Radio.The first time you open FM Radio, it automatically scans for available FM stations,saves them as presets, and plays the first FM station found.100 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Tuning in to an FM stationThere are several things you can do while you’re on the FM Radio screen:§Tap to view the All presets list, and then select a station you want to listen to.§Tap to go to the previous available FM station, or to go to the nextavailable FM station.§Drag the slider to tune in to a frequency on the FM band.§Tap to fine tune the radio frequency by -0.1 MHz or to fine tune the radiofrequency by +0.1 MHz.§Tap to add a preset name for the current station you are tuned into.§Press the VOLUME UP and VOLUME DOWN buttons to adjust the volume.§To repeat scanning and saving of FM stations, press , and then tap Scan &Save.§Press to mute the sound or to change the sound output to Mono or Stereo.You can also switch the sound output between the Speaker and Headset.Closing or turning off FM RadioYou can continue listening to the radio while using other apps on HTC Explorer orclose the FM Radio app completely.To Do thisTo close the FM RadioscreenPress . FM Radio continues to run in thebackground.To go back to the FM Radio screen, slide open theNotifications panel, and then tap FM Radio.To turn off completely andclose FM RadioTap on the FM Radio screen.Recording your voiceDon’t just think out loud. Use Voice Recorder to quickly capture your thoughts. Youcan also record your voice and set it as a ringtone.1. From the Home screen, tap > Voice Recorder.2. Hold the microphone near your mouth.3. Tap to start recording a voice clip. Voice Recorder can run on the background while you do other things onHTC Explorer, except when you open other apps that also use audio functions. Togo back to the Voice Recorder screen, slide open the Notifications panel, and thentap Voice Recorder.4. Tap to stop recording.5. Type a name for the voice clip and tap Save.101 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
6. To play back the voice clip, tap .7. To show options for sharing, deleting, or renaming the voice clip, press .Sharing a voice clip1. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap .2. Press and hold the voice clip you want to share, and then tap Share.3. From the available options, choose how you want to share the voice clip.Setting a voice clip as a ringtone1. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap .2. Press and hold the voice clip you want to set as a ringtone, and then tap Set asringtone.Sharing games and appsHaving fun with a game or app that you found from Android Market? Share yourfavorite games and apps instantly with your circle of friends.For your friends to link to the app and download it from Android Market, they mustbe using an Android device.1. From the Home screen, tap .2. Press , and then tap Share. You’ll then see the list of games and apps thatyou downloaded and installed from Android Market.3. Tap an app, and then choose how to share it.When your friends see the link in your sent message, email, or status update, they cansimply tap the link to go directly to the game or app in Android Market to download it.102 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
MessagesOpening MessagesKeep in touch with important people in your life. Use the Messages app to composeand send text (SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS).From the Home screen, tap > Messages. The All messages screen opens, where allyour sent and received messages are neatly grouped into conversations, by contactname or phone number.§Scroll up or down the list of conversations byswiping your finger on the screen.§Tap a contact name or number to view the exchangeof messages.You can also view your messages on the Home screen with the Messages widget.Sending a text message (SMS)1. From the Home screen, tap > Messages.2. Tap .3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:§Enter the first few letters of a contact name or starting digits of a mobilenumber. As you type, matching names with phone numbers from yourstored contacts are displayed. Tap a name or one of the contact’s numbers.§Tap , and then select the phone numbers of the contacts to whom youwant to send the message. You can also select contact groups asrecipients.§Enter the complete phone numbers directly in the To field.103 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message. §There is a limit on the number of characters for a single text message (displayedabove the Send button). If you exceed the limit, your text message will bedelivered as one but will be billed as more than one message.§Your text message automatically becomes a multimedia message if you enter anemail address as the recipient, add a message subject, attach an item, or composea very long message.5. Tap Send, or press to save the message as a draft.Sending a multimedia message (MMS)1. From the Home screen, tap > Messages.2. Tap .3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:§Enter the first few letters of a contact name or starting digits of a mobilenumber. As you type, matching names with phone numbers and emailaddresses from your stored contacts are displayed. Tap a contact’s numberor email address.§Tap , and then select the phone numbers of the contacts to whom youwant to send the message. You can also select contact groups asrecipients.§Enter the complete phone numbers or email address directly in the To field.4. To add a subject line, press and then tap Add subject.5. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message.104 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
6. Tap and then choose the type of attachment.Picture Take a photo and attach it, or attach an existing photo.Video Record a video and attach it, or attach an existingvideo.Audio Make a voice recording and attach it, or attach anexisting audio file.App recommendation Choose an app you’ve installed from Android Marketthat you want to share with others. The URL fromwhich the app can be downloaded will be inserted toyour message.Location Add your current location (requires GPS to be turnedon), or a location you pick on a map to your message.Contact (vCard) Select a contact, and then select the information toattach.Appointment(vCalendar)Select the calendar event you want to attach.After adding an attachment, tap to see options for replacing, viewing orremoving your attachment.7. Tap Send, or press to save the message as a draft.Why isn't the contact's email address showing up when I enter acontact name?If only phone numbers are showing up when you're entering a contact name,go to the Messages settings to enable displaying email addresses.1. If you've created a new message, press first to return to the Allmessages screen.2. Press and then tap Settings > General.3. Select the Show email address check box.Creating a slideshow1. After you've added either a photo, video, or audio in the multimedia messageyou’re composing, tap > Slideshow.2. Choose where you want to insert the next slide.105 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Right after adding a slide, do any of the following:Add a photo or video to aslideTap , and then choose to add a photo or avideo.Add music or a voicerecording to a slideTap > Audio.Add a caption to a slide Tap Add text and then enter your caption.Edit a slide Tap , and then choose to replace, remove, orset the duration of the slide.Preview the slideshow Press , and then tap Preview (or More >Preview). Tap once on the preview screen tosee playback controls.4. When finished, tap Send, or press to save the message as a draft.Resuming a draft message1. On the All messages screen, press , and then tap Drafts.2. Tap the message and then resume editing it.3. Tap Send.Viewing and replying to a messageDepending on your notification settings, HTC Explorer plays a sound, vibrates, ordisplays the message briefly in the status bar when you receive a new message. Anew message icon is also displayed in the status bar.1. To open and read the message, you can:§Press and hold the status bar, and then slide your finger down to open theNotifications panel. Then tap the new message notification.§Go to the Messages app and open the message.2. While reading the message, you can reply with a text or multimedia message.You can also do the following while reading the message:§Call the phone number contained in the message by tapping the number.§Tap the email address contained in the message to send an email.106 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
§Tap a link in the message to open it in the web browser.§Tap the message to open the options menu and choose what you want to dowith the message (such as forward, share, and more).Adjusting the font size of your messagesWhile reading a message conversation with a contact, spread out two fingers on thescreen to zoom in and make the text size bigger. Pinch the screen to zoom out.You can also press , and then tap More > Text size.Replying to another phone number of the contactWhen a contact has multiple phone numbers stored on HTC Explorer, you’ll see theparticular phone number used below the contact's name.Keep in mind that your response will be sent to the phone number of the latestmessage you’ve received from this contact.1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap , and then select another phone number of this contact.3. Tap the box that says Add text, then enter your reply message.4. Tap Send.Forwarding a message1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to view theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message you want to forward, and then tap Forward.107 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. In the To field, fill in one or more recipients.4. Tap Send.While viewing the exchange of messages with the contact, you can also press ,tap Forward (or More > Forward), and then tap the message you want to forward.Viewing and saving an attachment from amultimedia messageIf you are concerned about the size of your data downloads, check the multimediamessage size first before you download it.When Auto-retrieve in MMS settings is disabled, only the message header isdownloaded. To download the entire message, tap the Download button at theright side of the message.§If there’s a media attachment such as a photo or video in a received message,tap it to view the content.§If the attachment is a contact (vCard), tap it to view the contact information,then tap Save to add to your contacts.§If the attachment is an appointment or event (vCalendar), tap it to choose thecalendar where to save it, and then tap Import.§To save the attachment to your storage card, press and hold the multimediamessage, and then choose to save the type of attachment from the optionsmenu.Push messagesPush messages contain a web link. Often, the link will be to download a file that youhave requested from a service provider.When you receive a push message, a notification icon is displayed in the statusbar.Opening and reading a new push message1. Press and hold the status bar, and then slide the status bar down to open theNotifications panel.2. Tap the new message.3. Tap Visit website.108 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Viewing all your push messages1. From the Home screen, tap > Messages.2. Press , and then tap Push messages. You can only see this option if you've previously received push messages.Managing message conversationsProtecting a message from deletionYou can lock a message so that it will not be deleted even if you delete the othermessages in the conversation.1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message that you want to lock.3. Tap Lock message on the options menu. A lock icon is displayed at the righthand side of the message.Copying a text message to your SIM card1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message, and then tap Copy to SIM. A SIM card icon is displayed atthe right hand side of the message.Deleting a single message1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message that you want to delete.3. If the message is locked, tap Unlock message on the options menu, and then tapthe message to display the options menu again.4. Tap Delete message on the options menu.5. When prompted to confirm, tap OK.Deleting several messages within a conversation1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Press and then tap Delete (or More > Delete).109 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap Delete by selection. You can also tap Delete by phone number if the contact used multiple phonenumbers throughout the conversation and you want to delete the messages sentfrom a particular number.4. Select the messages you want to delete and then tap Delete.In the settings, you can set the Messages app to auto delete old messages perconversation.Deleting a conversation1. Do any of the following:§On the All messages screen, press and hold a contact (or phone number)whose messages you want to delete, and then tap Delete§While looking at the exchange of messages in a conversation, press andthen tap Delete > Delete thread (or More > Delete > Delete thread).Any locked messages in the conversation thread will not be deleted unlessyou select the Delete locked messages check box.2. When prompted to confirm, tap OK to delete the entire thread.Deleting several conversations1. On the All messages screen, press and then tap Delete.2. Select the conversation threads you want to delete.3. Tap Delete. Any locked messages will not be deleted.Backing up your text messages to the storagecard1. From the Home screen, tap > Messages.2. Press , and then tap Backup SMS > Backup SMS.3. Enter a name for your backup file, and then tap OK.Importing text messages from the storage cardYou can only import text messages that were exported to the storage card using theBackup SMS feature.1. From the Home screen, tap > Messages.2. Press , and then tap Backup SMS > Restore from backup.3. Tap the backup file to import.4. Tap OK.110 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting message optionsOn the All messages screen, press and then tap Settings.Notifications §Receive a notification in the status bar and set HTC Explorer tovibrate or play a sound when a message arrives or when a messageis not sent successfully, and choose a notification sound.§Allow HTC Explorer to show pop-up notifications on the screenwhen messages are sent successfully or not, or disable this option.§If you don't want the content of received text messages to appearon the lock screen and status bar, clear the Notification previewcheck box.Textmessages(SMS)§Receive a report on the delivery status of your message.§View or change the message service center number used. (Werecommend that you don't change the number here as it may causeproblems in receiving and sending messages.)§View or delete text messages stored on your SIM card, or copy SIMcard messages to device memory.Multimediamessages(MMS)§Receive a report on the delivery status of your message.§Receive a report whether each recipient has read the message ordeleted it without reading.§Automatically download complete MMS messages including themessage body and attachments in your service area and whenroaming.§Set the message priority and maximum file size of MMS messages.If the MMS message file size is exceeded, the message won't besent.General §Search and display the sent message history, call history, and emailaddresses of stored contacts when you’re adding messagerecipients.§Set the number of lines of text to preview for each message on theAll messages screen.§Choose the maximum number of text or MMS messages to store ineach conversation thread (excluding locked messages), and enableautomatic deletion of unlocked older messages when set limits arereached.§Forward received text and MMS messages to another phonenumber or email address. (This may incur extra fees.)§Add a signature to your messages.111 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
EmailGmailUsing GmailWhen you first set up HTC Explorer, make sure you sign into your Google Account touse Gmail. If you didn’t do so, go to the Accounts & sync setting to sign in.You can also set up more than one Google Account on HTC Explorer, and then switchbetween accounts in Gmail.Viewing your Gmail InboxAll your received emails are delivered to your Inbox.From the Home screen, tap > Gmail. Your Gmail inbox then opens.Archive, delete orlabel multipleconversationsTap before the email orconversation. Then tap theonscreen buttons at the bottomto choose what to do with theselected messages orconversations.Display drafts, sentmessages, andother labelsTap Inbox at the top left of thescreen, and then tap another label(such as Sent, Drafts, or yourcreated label) to view itsmessages and conversations.Switch to yourother GmailaccountTap the current account at thetop right of the screen, and thentap another account you want toswitch to.Refresh the Inbox Press , and then tap Refresh.Sending a new message1. In the Gmail inbox, press and then tap Compose.2. If you’ve set up multiple Google Accounts on HTC Explorer, choose which Gmailaddress you want to use for sending your email. Tap the box that shows yourcurrent Gmail address, and then tap another address that you want to use forsending.112 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field. If you are sendingthe email to several recipients, separate the email addresses with a comma.If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the email toother recipients, press and then tap Add Cc/Bcc.4. Enter the email subject, and then compose your email.5. If you want to attach a picture, press and then tap Attach.6. Locate and then tap the picture you want to attach.7. After composing your message, tap . While composing the message, tap to save it as a draft. Or press to discardthe message.Replying to or forwarding an email message1. In the Gmail inbox, tap the email message or conversation.2. To reply to the sender, tap . Or, tap and choose whether to Reply all orForward.3. Do one of the following:§If you selected Reply or Reply all, enter your reply message.§If you selected Forward, specify the message recipients.Tap Respond inline if you want to interleave your new message with the receivedemail. But this removes any attachments or formatting in the original email.4. Tap .Getting helpTo find out more about using Gmail, press , and then tap More > Help. The webbrowser will take you to the Google Mobile Help site.MailAbout the Mail appUse the Mail app to add your webmail and other POP3 or IMAP email accounts. Youcan also set up and use your Exchange ActiveSync email on HTC Explorer.You can add the Mail widget to view your POP3/IMAP or Exchange ActiveSyncemails on the Home screen.113 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Adding a POP3/IMAP email account1. From the Home screen, tap > Mail.2. Do one of the following:§If this is your first time to add an email account in Mail, tap Other (POP3/IMAP) on the Choose a mail provider screen.§If you’ve already added an email account in Mail, press , and then tapMore > New account. If the Choose a mail provider screen is displayed, tapOther (POP3/IMAP).3. Enter the email address and password for your email account and then tapNext.4. If the account type you want to set up is not in the internal database, you’ll beasked to enter more details.5. Enter the account name and your name and then tap Finish setup.Adding a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accountYou can add one or more Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts on HTC Explorer.You can sync with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack (SP2) or later.You can add up to 15 Exchange ActiveSync accounts on HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, tap > Mail.2. Do one of the following:§If this is your first time to add an email account in Mail, tap MicrosoftExchange ActiveSync on the Choose a mail provider screen.§If you’ve already added an email account in Mail, press , and then tapMore > New account. If the Choose a mail provider screen is displayed, tapMicrosoft Exchange ActiveSync.3. Enter the Exchange ActiveSync account details, and then tap Next. If yourcorporate Exchange Server does not support auto-detect, you’ll need to enteryour Exchange Server settings after you tap Next. Ask your Exchange Serveradministrator for details.4. Choose the types of information you want to sync. Also choose how often youwant to update and sync email to HTC Explorer, then tap Next.5. Enter the account name, then tap Finish setup.114 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Checking your Mail inboxWhen you open the Mail app, it displays the inbox of one of your email accounts thatyou’ve set up on HTC Explorer.To switch between email accounts, tap the bar that shows the current email account,and then tap another account.Viewing the unified inbox of all your email accountsYou can view email messages from all your accounts just in one place without havingto switch to different accounts.Just tap the bar that shows the current email account, and then tap All accounts.Email messages are color coded so you can easily distinguish which email accountsthey belong to.Up to 15 email accounts can be shown in the unified inbox.Switching between different views of your inboxIf you have lots of email messages, it may take you some time to browse through thelong list and find a single email or related email messages. Use the tabs of the Mail appto sort your emails into different categories.To skim through your email messages easier, tap one of the following tabs to changethe view of your inbox:InboxDisplays email messages as individual items.ThreadDisplays email messages as conversations, grouped according to the subjectline. Tap a subject in the list to show the email conversation.115 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
GroupDisplays all email messages from a contact group. To choose which contactgroup to display, press , tap View, and then select a group.UnreadDisplays unread messages.Marked (Exchange ActiveSync only)Displays all flagged messages.Invites or Meeting invitations (Exchange ActiveSync only)Displays meeting invitations which you have not yet accepted or declined.AttachmentsDisplays all messages that have attachments.Can't see the tab that you want? Press and hold a tab and wait for the screen toshow the other tabs. You can tap and hold a tab, and then drag it to where youwant it.Refreshing an email accountWhatever your automatic synchronization settings are, you can also synchronize yoursent and received emails manually at any time.§While in the account you want to synchronize, press , and then tap Refresh.§If you have several email accounts, you can refresh them all at the same time.Go to the All accounts inbox first. Then press and tap Refresh.Sorting email messagesYou can sort email messages by date received, priority, subject, sender, or size.On the inbox, press , tap Sort, and select from the sorting options.Quickly browsing your inboxIf you have a long list of email messages in your inbox, it may not be easy to browsethe list and find an email that you want. You can quickly browse through your inboxby using finger gestures.1. Choose a sorting order for displaying your email messages.2. Press and hold two fingers on any email message, and then drag upward ordownward without lifting your fingers. Your screen then jumps to the set ofemail messages based on your chosen sorting order.116 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Managing email messagesDeleting an email message1. On the inbox, press and hold the message you want to delete.2. On the options menu, tap Delete.Selecting several email messages1. Tap the check boxes of email messages to select them.2. Choose what you want to do with the selected messages: Mark read (or markMark unread), Delete, or Move to another folder.You cannot move email messages when you’re in the unified (All accounts) inbox.Moving several email messages to another folder1. Switch to the email account you want to use.2. Tap the check boxes of email messages you want to move.3. Tap Move to, and then tap the folder where to move the email messages.Moving an email message after reading1. While viewing the email, tap Move to.2. Tap the folder where you want to move the email message.Deleting all messages1. First tap the check box of any email message.2. Press , and then tap Select all.3. Tap Delete.Switching to other mail folders1. Press , and then tap Folders.2. Tap the mail folder whose messages you want to view.Sending an email message1. From the Home screen, tap > Mail.2. Switch to the email account that you want to use for sending email.3. On the email account inbox, tap .117 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:§Enter email addresses directly in the To field, separating them with acomma. As you enter email addresses, any matching addresses from yourcontacts list are displayed. Tap a match to enter that address directly.§Tap the icon, and then choose the contacts to whom you want to sendthe message. You can also select contact groups as recipients, or searchand add contacts.If the contact name you entered is not found and you have an ExchangeActiveSync account in the Mail app, you can search for the contact in yourcompany directory.If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the email toother recipients, press , and then tap Show Cc/Bcc.5. Enter the subject, and then compose your message.6. To add an attachment, press , tap Attach, and choose from the followingoptions:Picture Take a photo and attach it, or attach an existing photo.Video Record a video and attach it, or attach an existingvideo.Audio Attach an audio file.App recommendation Choose an app you’ve installed from Android Marketthat you want to tell other people about. The URL fromwhich the app can be downloaded will be inserted inyour email.Location You can attach location information. Send your currentlocation (requires GPS to be turned on) or a locationyou pick on a map.Document Attach a PDF file or an Office document such as a textfile or a spreadsheet.Contact (vCard) Attach someone’s contact information.Appointment(vCalendar)Attach a calendar event.File Attach any other file.7. Tap Send to send the message immediately, or tap Save as draft to send it later.If there’s no Internet connection available or Airplane mode is on when you sendyour email, the email will be saved to the Outbox folder. Once there’s Internetconnection available, the saved email will be sent automatically next timeHTC Explorer syncs.118 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Resuming a draft email message1. In the email account inbox, press , and then tap Folders > Drafts.2. Tap the message.3. When you finish editing the message, tap Send.Managing the recipient listFilled up the To field but want to make changes in it? You can manage the recipientlist and change who appears in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields.You must have entered contacts in the To, Cc, or Bcc field.1. In the To, Cc, or Bcc field, tap the Edit button. The names of the contacts arelisted.2. Tap the checkbox beside the contact that you want to move to another field.3. Tap the action that apply.4. When you are done with the changes, press to go back to composing youremail.Reading and replying to an email message1. From the Home screen, tap > Mail.2. Switch to the email account you want to use.3. On the email account inbox, tap the email you want to read.4. Choose an action on the bottom of the screen for your email. Press to see options for deleting your email or marking it as unread.Where are my unread emails?The Unread tab contains all your unread emails. Add it if it does not appear onyour screen.1. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you the areawhere you can rearrange icons, lift your finger.2. Press and hold the Unread tab, and then drag it to its new position.3. Press , and then tap the Unread tab.119 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting the priority for an email messageYou can set the priority for an email message that you send.1. While composing the message, press .2. Tap Set priority.3. Select the priority for the message.If you selected High or Low priority, the priority appears below the subject line of themessage.Searching and filtering emailsSearch emails in all your email accounts or in a specific one. You can even refine yoursearch by indicating which part of the email will be searched.1. Press .2. If you want to refine or filter your search, tap and then check the optionsthat apply. For example, you can focus the search on a part of an email or filteremails that have attachments or tagged as high priority.3. Tap OK.4. Enter the first few characters of the item you're looking for in the search box.Results will then be listed.Tap a result to open the email.Searching emails from a contactDo you remember the sender, but can't find a particular email from this contact? Youcan search your mail accounts for emails from a specific contact.1. Switch to the email account you want to use.2. Press and hold an email from a contact.3. Tap Search the mail from the sender. A list of emails from that contact appears.Working with Exchange ActiveSync emailYou can read, reply, send, and manage your work email in the same easy way as witha POP3/IMAP account. In addition, you can also use some powerful Exchangefeatures.Flagging an email§While viewing the inbox, tap the white flag icon that appears on the right ofan email message. The icon turns red after you flagged the email.§While reading an email, you can also tap the flag icon in the email.120 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting your Out of the office status1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.2. Press and then tap More > Out of the office.3. Tap the box, and then select Out of the office.4. Set the dates and times for the period when you will be out of the office.5. Enter the auto-reply message. You can also send auto-reply messages to external recipients, which are contactswhose addresses are not in the same Microsoft Exchange server.6. Tap Save.Sending a meeting request1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.2. Go to the Invitations tab, and then tap .3. Enter the meeting details.4. Tap Save.Changing email account settings1. Switch to the email account whose settings you want to change.2. Press , and then tap More > Settings.3. Select from the following:Account settings Change the email account settings such as the name,email address, password, and description.General settings Set the font size when reading emails, enable, disable orset the signature, set the account as the default emailaccount, and set where to save email attachments.Send & Receive Set the sync settings for incoming and outgoing emailssuch as maximum size limit, update schedule, and more.NotificationsettingsSet email notification settings.Delete account Tap to delete the email account.4. Press to save your changes.Deleting an email account1. Switch to the email account you want to delete.2. Press , and then tap More > Settings > Delete account.121 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
CalendarAbout CalendarNever miss an important date again. Use the Calendar app to schedule your events,meetings, and appointments.You can set up HTC Explorer to stay in sync with the following types of calendars:§On HTC Explorer, sign in to your Google Account so you can sync the Calendarapp with your Google Calendar online. You can add multiple Google Accounts.§If you're using Microsoft Outlook on your computer, you can set up HTC Syncon your computer to sync Outlook Calendar with the Calendar app.§If you have a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account and you've added it onHTC Explorer, you can sync the Calendar app with your Exchange ActiveSynccalendar events.If you've signed in to Facebook, birthdays and events of friends will appear inCalendar.Creating an eventYou can create events that sync with your Google or Exchange ActiveSync calendars,as well as events on HTC Explorer.Not signed in yet on your accounts? Your calendar events will be created under PCSync, which you can later sync with your computer's Outlook Calendar throughHTC Sync.1. From the Home screen, tap > Calendar.2. On any Calendar view, tap .3. If you have more than one calendar, select a calendar in which to add the event.4. If you want to invite people to your event, tap and choose attendees fromyour contacts or company directory.5. Enter a name for the event.6. To specify the date and time of the event, do one of the following:§If there is a time frame for the event, tap the From and To date and time toset them.§If it is a whole-day event, such as a birthday, set the From and To date, thenselect the All day check box.7. Enter the event location and description.122 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
8. Set the reminder time. You can add another reminder time in a Google Calendar event. Press and thentap Add reminder.9. If the event occurs on a regular basis, tap the Repetition box and then choosehow often the event occurs.10. Tap Save.Changing Calendar viewsEasily switch between different calendar views by tapping the onscreen buttons.Day viewWeek viewMonth viewAgenda viewMeeting invitations§In Day, Week, and Agenda views, events are color coded to indicate whichaccount or type of calendar they belong to. To find out what each colorrepresents, tap .§Can't see the tab that you want? Press and hold a tab and wait for the screen toshow the other tabs. You can press and hold a tab, and then drag it to where youwant it.Using month viewIn month view, you will see markers on days that have events.Do any of the following in month view:§Tap a day to view the events for that day.§Press and hold a day to open an options menu from which you can also chooseto create an event or switch to either day or agenda view.§Slide your finger up or down the screen to view earlier or later months.123 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using day and agenda viewsDay view shows your events per day, whereas agenda view displays all your events inchronological order.When in day view:§Press and hold on a time slot to create a new event at that time.§Slide left or right across the screen to view earlier or later days.§You can also see the day's weather, but only if it's within the five-day forecast.Using week viewWeek view displays a chart of the events of one week.When in week view, you can:§Press and hold on a time slot to create a new event at that time.§Tap an event (shown as colored blocks) to view its details.§Slide left or right across the screen to view earlier or later weeks.Managing Calendar eventsViewing an eventYou can view your own events as well as events that other people have shared withyou.1. In day view or agenda view, tap an event. The Event details screen then opensand shows the summary of the event.2. Depending on the event information, do any of the following:§Find the event’s location in Maps.§Call any phone number included in the event location or description.§Check the participants of the event.§If the event was sent as a meeting invitation, respond to the invitation.§If it’s an Exchange ActiveSync calendar event, reply by email to theorganizer or to all the guests. Press , and then tap Reply or Reply all (orMore > Reply or Reply all).§Select any text and look it up on the Web.§Tap the reminder time to change it. Press to save changes.You can return to the current date by tapping .124 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Editing an eventYou can edit events that you have created.1. While viewing an event, tap .2. Make your changes to the event.3. When you’re done editing, tap Save.Deleting an eventDo any of the following:§While viewing the summary of an event on the Event details screen, press andthen tap Delete event.§In day, agenda or week view, press and hold an event and then tap Delete event.§When editing an event, tap Delete.If the event repeats, you’ll be asked whether you want to delete just that occurrenceor all occurrences from Calendar.Sharing an event (vCalendar)You can share a calendar event as a vCalendar using Bluetooth or by sending it as afile attachment with your email or message.1. While viewing an event, press , and then tap Forward.2. Do one of the following:§Tap Bluetooth. You’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer andconnect to the receiving Bluetooth device.§Tap Mail. A new message window opens and automatically includes thevCalendar as an attachment. Your default email account will be used tosend the message.§Tap Message. A new message window opens and automatically includesthe vCalendar as a multimedia attachment.Accepting or declining a meeting invitation1. If you're using an Exchange ActiveSync account on HTC Explorer, tap theInvites tab in Calendar to see meeting invitations which you have not yetaccepted or declined.2. Tap a meeting invitation, and then do one of the following:§Accept, decline, or tentatively accept the invitation or propose a new time.§Press to see options for replying, moving the invitation to a folder, andmore.125 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Dismissing or snoozing event remindersIf you have set at least one reminder for an event, the upcoming event icon willappear in the notifications area of the status bar to remind you of the upcomingevent.1. Tap the status bar, then slide your finger down the screen to open theNotifications panel.2. Do one of the following:§Tap Clear to dismiss event reminders and all other notifications.§After sliding open the Notifications panel, tap the calendar event reminder.You’ll then see a list of all pending event reminders. Tap Snooze all tosnooze all event reminders for five minutes, or tap Dismiss all to dismiss allevent reminders.§Press to keep the reminders pending in the notifications area of thestatus bar.Showing or hiding calendarsIn any Calendar view, tap , and then select or clear a calendar to show or hide it. Calendars are kept synchronized on HTC Explorer, whether or not you hide them.Changing Calendar settingsYou can change Calendar settings to specify how it displays events and how it notifiesyou of upcoming events.In any Calendar view, press and then tap Settings (or More > Settings).Reminder settingsAll calendars Select this check box to use the same event reminder settingsfor all types of calendars. If you clear this check box, you canset different reminder settings for each calendar.Set alerts &notificationsConfigure event reminders to open an alert, send you anotification, or turn off event notifications on HTC Explorer.Default remindertimeChoose how soon before an event you want to be notified.Select ringtone Choose a ringtone to sound when you receive an eventreminder.Hide declined events Choose whether to show or hide events for which you'vedeclined invitations.126 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Calendar view settingsFirst day ofweekSet the month and week views to start on a Sunday or Monday.Include weather Select this check box to show weather information in the day viewevents list.City If weather is included, by default, day view displays your currentlocation's weather. You can change it to display the weather ofanother city.About the Calendar widgetYou can add a Calendar widget to your Home screen. The widgets offer differentcalendar views.Tapping a day or event on the widget brings you to the Calendar app.127 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Maps and locationLocation settingsTurning on location servicesIn order to find your location on HTC Explorer, you need to enable location sources.1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings > Location.2. Select one or both of the following:Use wirelessnetworksUses Wi-Fi or your mobile data connection to find yourapproximate location.Use GPS satellites Finds your exact GPS location. This requires a clear viewof the sky and more battery power.Google MapsAbout Google MapsGoogle Maps™ lets you track your current location, view real-time traffic situations,and receive detailed directions to your destination.It also provides a search tool where you can locate places of interest or an address ona map, or view locations at street level.§You need to connect to the Internet to use Google Maps.§To find your location with Google Maps, you need to enable location sources.§The Google Maps app does not cover every country or city.128 Maps and locationHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Getting around mapsWhen you open Google Maps, you can easily find your location on the map or checkout nearby places by panning and zooming in and out on the map.To find your location with Google Maps, you need to enable location sources.1. From the Home screen, tap > Maps.2. Tap to show your current location. The blue marker shows your currentlocation on the map.3. Do any of the following:Move around Swipe your finger to any direction on the screen to viewnearby places on the map.Use CompassmodeTap to switch to Compass mode. In Compass mode, themap changes to an angled view and automatically orientsitself depending on the direction you're facing.Zoom in §Place your thumb and index fingers on top of the area thatyou want to zoom in, and then spread your fingers acrossthe map.§Tap .§Double-tap the area on the map that you want to zoom in.Zoom out §Pinch your thumb and index finger on the map to zoomout.§Tap .Viewinformation for arandom location1. Press and hold a location on the map. A balloon opens overthe location, with the address and a thumbnail from streetview (if available).2. Tap the balloon to see more information.You can get directions to the location, check for nearbyplaces of interest, and more.129 Maps and locationHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Searching for a locationIn Google Maps, you can search for a location, such as an address or a type ofbusiness or establishment (for example, museums).1. In Maps, enter the place you want to search for in the search box.2. Tap to search for the location you entered or tap a suggested search item.The search results are displayed as markers on the map.3. Do any of the following:§Tap a marker to see if that is what you’re looking for, tap the balloon if itis.§Tap to show the search results as a list, and then tap the location.Details about the selected location displays on the screen.4. Do any of the following:§Tap the onscreen buttons to view the location on a map, get directions,view the location in Street View, if available, and more. Scroll down thescreen to view more options.§Swipe left or right across the screen to view the information for the next orprevious search result.Clearing the mapAfter searching on a map, you can clear away the various markers drawn on it.Press , and then tap Clear Map.Searching for a place of interest near youUse Places to find places of interest near your current location. Places uses GoogleMaps to search common places that you would want to find, such as the nearest gasstation or ATM kiosk.Before using Places, you need to enable location sources.1. From the Home screen, tap > Places.2. Tap the type of place you want to search.3. Do any of the following:§When one or two places of interest are found, the search results aredisplayed as markers on the map. You can tap the marker, and then tap theballoon to view more information about the place.§When several places are found, the search results display in a list. Tap aplace to view more information.130 Maps and locationHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Getting directionsGet detailed directions to your destination. Google Maps can provide directions fortravel by foot, public transportation, or car.1. While viewing a map, press , and then tap Directions.2. Do any of the following:§Use your current location as the starting point, or enter a location fromwhere to start in the first text box. Then enter your destination in thesecond text box.§Tap to select an address from your contacts or a point that you tap on amap.3. Choose how you want to get to your destination by tapping the car, publictransit, bike, or walk button.4. Tap Get directions. The next screen displays the directions to your destination ina list.If the place you’ve set as your destination has several locations available, choosewhich one to go to.5. Tap an item to view the directions on the map.6. Tap the arrow buttons on the map to follow the directions.When you’re finished viewing or following the directions, press and then tap ClearMap to reset the map. Your destination is automatically saved in the Google Mapshistory.131 Maps and locationHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Getting helpGet help and more information about Maps.To open the help, press , and then tap More > Help. The web browser opens andtakes you to the Google Maps Help site.Finding your friends with Google Latitude (available by country)Google Latitude® user location service lets you and your friends share locations andstatus messages with each other. It also lets you get directions to your friends’locations, send your location details by email, and more.Your location is not shared automatically. You must join Latitude, and then invite yourfriends to view your location or accept their invitations. Only friends that you haveexplicitly invited or accepted can see your location.Opening and joining Latitude1. From the Home screen, tap > Maps.2. While viewing a map, press and then tap Join Latitude.3. After you’ve joined Latitude and closed the application, you can do any of thefollowing to open it from the Home screen:§Tap > Latitude.§Open Maps, press , and then tap Latitude.132 Maps and locationHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
HTC SyncAbout HTC SyncYou have your new vacation photos on HTC Explorer while your business calendar ison your computer. Why not make your files and information available on bothdevices?With HTC Sync, you can:§Sync your contacts between your Microsoft Outlook, Outlook Express orWindows Contacts on your computer and HTC Explorer.§Sync your calendar events between the Outlook or Windows Calendar on yourcomputer and HTC Explorer.§Bring your photos, videos, documents, songs, and playlists to HTC Explorer andenjoy them on the go.§Easily import your captured photos and videos from HTC Explorer to yourcomputer.§Store the same web bookmarks on both your computer and HTC Explorer.§Install third-party mobile apps from your computer.You need a storage card inserted into HTC Explorer to be able to sync multimediafiles and documents.Installing HTC Sync§HTC Sync requires USB 2.0 on your computer to connect and sync withHTC Explorer.§For trouble-free installation, first quit all running programs and temporarily exitfrom your anti-virus program before you start installing HTC Sync.Do either of the following:§Check and copy the HTC Sync installer from the storage card (if available), andthen install it on your computer.§Download the HTC Sync software for HTC Explorer from our support website(www.htc.com/support/) and install it on your computer.133 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting up HTC Sync to recognizeHTC Explorer1. Connect HTC Explorer to your computer using the USB cable that came in thebox.2. When HTC Explorer prompts you to choose a type of USB connection, tap HTCSync, and then tap Done. Wait for HTC Sync to recognize HTC Explorer.3. On the Device setup screen, enter a name for HTC Explorer.4. Click Save. The Device panel then opens.To change the name of HTC Explorer later, click Overview > Device setup.Getting to know the workspaceOn the Device panel, you can set your sync options, see general information aboutHTC Explorer, check the used and available storage space, and begin synchronization.The available categories and options depend on the device you've connected toyour computer.§You can click a category of items to see its sync options on the right side of theDevice panel.Clicking Overview displays basic software information and storage usage, andlets you change the name of HTC Explorer, or install third-party applications toHTC Explorer.§The Sync now button lets you start syncing the categories and options you'veselected.§The estimated storage usage bar beside the Sync now button shows you theestimated storage space that will be used when there are new items to besynchronized and added to HTC Explorer.134 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting up synchronizationYou can choose the types of files and information you want to sync betweenHTC Explorer and your computer.Music sync optionsBring the music tracks and songs you play on your computer to HTC Explorer. If youhave playlists created in iTunes® or Windows Media® Player, you can sync these tooand enjoy them on the go.You can sync audio files in these formats: *.aac, *.amr, *.m4a, *.mid, *.midi, *.mp3,*.wav, *.wma1. On the Device panel, click Music, and then click the On button. Turning Musicsync on means you want this category included every time you sync yourcomputer and HTC Explorer.2. Select Sync music files from, and then click Add.3. Choose a folder that contains your audio files, and then click OK.4. Select Sync music files from iTunes and Windows Media Player if you're usingeither of these software on your computer, and then choose the playlists youwant to sync on HTC Explorer.Gallery sync optionsYou can automatically sync photos and videos between HTC Explorer and acomputer.You can sync photos and videos in these formats:§Photos: *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpeg, *.jpg, *.png§Videos: *.3gp, *.3g2, *.mp4, *.wmv1. On the Device panel, click Gallery, and then click the On button. Turning Gallerysync on means you want this category included every time you sync yourcomputer and HTC Explorer.2. To automatically import your camera shots to your computer duringsynchronization, select Copy device Camera Shots to PC. Photos and videosfrom HTC Explorer will be saved to the \My Photos\Device Camera Shotsfolder on your computer.3. Select Sync PC photos & videos from, and then click Add.4. Choose a folder that contains your multimedia files, and then click OK. Allsupported image and video files added to this folder will be copied toHTC Explorer during synchronization.135 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Calendar sync optionsHTC Explorer can sync appointments and events with your calendar in Outlook(Outlook XP, Outlook 2003 or Outlook 2007) or Windows Calendar.1. On the Device panel, click Calendar, and then click the On button. TurningCalendar sync on means you want this category included every time you syncyour computer and HTC Explorer.2. Select the application you want to sync calendar events with.3. Choose from which point you want to start synchronizing your calendar events.4. In cases when conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and thecomputer, choose which information you want to keep.Only the calendar fields supported on HTC Explorer will be synchronized.People sync optionsSync HTC Explorer contacts with your Outlook (Outlook XP, Outlook 2003 or Outlook2007), Outlook Express, or Windows Contacts.If you have contacts to sync from your SIM card, you have to import these first toHTC Explorer storage.1. On the Device panel, click People, and then click the On button. Turning Peoplesync on means you want this category included every time you sync yourcomputer and HTC Explorer.2. Choose the application you want to sync your contacts with.3. In cases when conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and thecomputer, choose which information you want to keep.Only the contact fields supported on HTC Explorer will be synchronized.136 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Bookmarks sync optionsSync web browser bookmarks between HTC Explorer and a computer.If you are using Google Chrome™ or Firefox® Internet browser and have selected itto sync with HTC Explorer, make sure to close all browser windows before youbegin synchronization.1. Using your favorite web browser on your computer, create a favorites foldernamed HTC bookmarks. Make sure to save your favorite bookmarks in thisfolder to be able to sync them with HTC Explorer.2. On HTC Sync's Device panel, click Bookmarks, and then click the On button.Turning Bookmarks sync on means you want this category included every timeyou sync your computer and HTC Explorer.3. Choose the web browser that stores the bookmarks to sync with HTC Explorer.When conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and computer, HTCSync keeps the information from your computer.Documents sync optionsYou can sync files and documents from your computer to HTC Explorer. You can alsosync email attachments that you stored on HTC Explorer to your computer.§To open a document on HTC Explorer, you'll need a compatible app.§To sync email attachments stored on HTC Explorer to your computer, you mustset up an Exchange ActiveSync or POP3/IMAP email account from the Mail app onHTC Explorer.1. On the Device panel, click Documents, and then click the On button. TurningDocuments sync on means you want this category included every time you syncyour computer and HTC Explorer.2. To sync email attachments that you've stored on HTC Explorer, select Copy alldownload Mail documents to PC. 3. Select Sync PC documents from, and then click Add.4. Choose a folder that contains the documents you want to sync onHTC Explorer, and then click OK.Email attachments will be saved on the \My Documents\ folder.137 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Synchronizing HTC ExplorerCheck the estimated usage bar beside the Sync now button for the estimated file sizeof new items to sync on HTC Explorer.1. After selecting and customizing the categories you want to sync, click Syncnow.2. After synchronization is complete, click Disconnect.3. Safely remove HTC Explorer as required by your computer's operating system.The next time you connect HTC Explorer to your computer, synchronizationautomatically begins based on your sync settings.Installing an app from your computer toHTC ExplorerIf you have application files (*.apk) on your computer, you can use HTC Sync toinstall them to HTC Explorer. We strongly recommend you install only applicationsthat you trust.Before you begin, make sure that HTC Explorer is set to allow applications fromyour computer to be installed toHTC Explorer. To do this, press while on theHome screen, tap Settings > Applications, and then select the Unknown sourcescheck box.1. On the Device panel, click Overview.2. Click Application installer.3. Browse for the application file on your computer, and then click Open. Theinstallation process starts on HTC Explorer.4. Check the screen on HTC Explorer to see if there are additional instructions tocomplete the installation.5. After installation is complete, you can click Disconnect.6. Safely remove HTC Explorer as required by your computer's operating system.138 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Synchronizing another device with yourcomputerYou can switch from one device to another, if you have more than one device to sync.1. Connect another device to your computer, then set up HTC Sync to recognizeit.2. Click the device you want to set up or begin synchronization. The Device panelthen opens, where you can separately customize your sync settings for thisdevice.To switch to another device to sync, click Devices, and then click the device's name orimage.Downloading the latest HTC Sync upgradeVisit the HTC support website (www.htc.com/support/) from time to time to checkfor the most recent HTC Sync upgrade so you can download and install it on yourcomputer.After installing the latest upgrade, set up HTC Sync again to recognize and sync withHTC Explorer.139 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
HTCSense.comSigning up for your HTCSense.com accountYou can sign up for your HTCSense.com account on HTC Explorer or your computer’sweb browser.Signing up from HTC Explorer1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Tap Add account > HTC Sense.3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign up for your HTCSense.com account.Signing up from your computerMake sure you have HTC Explorer close by. You’ll need it to complete the sign-upprocess.1. On your computer, open your web browser.2. Go to www.htcsense.com.3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign up for your HTCSense.com account.After signing up to HTCSense.com on the Web, you have to sign in using the sameaccount credentials on HTC Explorer.Updating your HTCSense.com account details1. On your computer, open your web browser and sign in to your HTCSense.comaccount.2. On the upper-right corner, click Account.3. Update your account details, and then click Save Changes.Turning on Device finderSome features of HTCSense.com require that the Device finder option onHTC Explorer is selected.1. On HTC Explorer, from the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Location.3. Select the Device finder check box.140 HTCSense.comHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using HTCSense.comForgot HTC Explorer at home or you can’t find it? Or worse, it slipped out of yourpocket while riding the train. Use HTCSense.com to communicate with HTC Explorerso you can forward calls and messages to a different number, make HTC Explorerring, lock it, and even erase its contents.To use these features, you'll need to sign in to HTCSense.com on a computer webbrowser.Making HTC Explorer ringYou know HTC Explorer is somewhere in your home but you just can’t find it. MakeHTC Explorer ring, even if it’s on mute, so that you can find it. Hopefully, it’s justburied under some clothes in the hamper.On HTCSense.com, click Ring.Forwarding calls and messagesYou can forward calls and messages to another phone if you don’t have HTC Explorerwith you.Before turning on Forward calls or Forward messages, you need to customizesettings first such as specifying an alternate phone number or email address.§To forward calls, click the Forward calls On/Off switch. (Be sure that Enable callforwarding is selected in Settings.)§To forward messages, click the Forward messages On/Off switch. (You shouldselect Forward messages to device or Forward messages to an email address inSettings.)Locating HTC ExplorerLeft HTC Explorer somewhere while doing your errands? You can use HTCSense.comto find its approximate location.You must have the Phone finder option selected in Settings > Location onHTC Explorer for this feature to work.On HTCSense.com, check the map to see where HTC Explorer is. Click Refreshlocation to refresh the map.141 HTCSense.comHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Locking HTC ExplorerLost HTC Explorer? Lock HTC Explorer and show a message onscreen so if somebodyfinds it, they can contact you.1. On HTCSense.com, click Lock device.2. Enter a PIN, an alternate phone number to call if somebody finds HTC Explorer,and a short message to show onscreen. The alternate number is shown on the screen. If somebody happens to findHTC Explorer, that person can simply tap it to call that number using HTC Explorer.3. Click Save.Erasing the contents of HTC ExplorerIf there’s no chance of getting HTC Explorer back, you can erase the contents ofHTC Explorer and the installed storage card so no one sees sensitive information onHTC Explorer.There’s no way to recover HTC Explorer and storage card data after you erase thecontents so be absolutely sure before you proceed.1. On HTCSense.com, click Erase device.2. When asked to confirm, click Erase device.Deleting your HTCSense.com account1. On your computer, open your web browser and sign in to your HTCSense.comaccount.2. On the upper-right corner, click Account.3. Click Click here to delete your HTCSense account.Deleting your HTCSense.com account will also delete your data on HTCSense.comservers.142 HTCSense.comHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
KeyboardUsing the onscreen keyboardWhen you start an app or select a field that requires text or numbers, the onscreenkeyboard becomes available. After entering your text, you can tap or press toclose the onscreen keyboard.Selecting a keyboard layoutYou can choose from three different keyboard layouts to suit your typing style.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Keyboard types, and then select the keyboard layout that you want to use.Standard This layout is similar to a desktop computer keyboard. This is thedefault keyboard layout.Phone This layout resembles the traditional mobile phone keypad.Compact This layout features two letters on each key. The key size is slightlybigger than on the Standard layout.Entering textUse the following keys while entering text using the onscreen keyboard:Press and hold keys with gray characters at the top to enter numbers, symbols,or accented letters. The gray character displayed on the key is the character thatwill be inserted when you press and hold that key. Some keys have multiplecharacters or accents associated with them.Shift key. Tap to enter an uppercase letter. Tap twice to turn on caps lock.Tap to switch to the numeric and symbol keyboard.Enter key. Tap to create a new line.Backspace key. Tap to delete the previous character.Language key. The key you see depends on the keyboard language you arecurrently using. Tap to switch to another keyboard language. You can alsoaccess onscreen keyboard settings.143 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Tap to toggle between Multitap and XT9 predictive modes when using theCompact or Phone keyboard layout.Tap to hide the onscreen keyboard.Enabling multiple keyboard languagesIf there are multiple keyboard languages available on HTC Explorer, you can choosewhich languages to enable in the onscreen keyboard so that you can switch to theselanguages and use them to enter text.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap International keyboard.3. Choose the languages you want. Available languages depend on the region where you purchased HTC Explorer.Changing to the landscape onscreen keyboardWhen entering text, you can choose to use the landscape orientation of the onscreenkeyboard. Turn HTC Explorer sideways to use a larger keyboard for easy typing.§Select the Auto-rotate screen check box in > > Settings > Display to allowthe screen orientation to automatically change.§The landscape orientation keyboard is not supported in all apps.Entering words with predictive textThe onscreen keyboard has predictive text to help you type quickly and accurately.Predictive text input is enabled by default, and word suggestions are displayed as youtype.To enter a word in predictive mode, do any of the following:§If you see the word you want highlighted in green or orange, just tap the spacebar to insert the word into your text.§If you see the word you want shown in the suggestions before you have finishedtyping the entire word, tap the word to insert it into your text.§If an arrow is shown to the right of the suggestion list, tap the arrow to see moresuggestions.144 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting a second language for the keyboardAside from the keyboard language you are currently using, you can set the predictivetext to be bilingual. As you type, you’ll get word suggestions in two languages thatyou’ve selected.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Bilingual prediction, and then choose the language you want.Adding a word to the predictive text dictionaryHTC Explorer comes with a list of words that it references for predictive textsuggestions. While entering text using the Standard keyboard layout, if you tap anyword on the suggestion list, it is automatically added to the predictive text dictionaryif it was not in the dictionary already.You can also add a word to the list manually.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Personal dictionary > Edit personal dictionary > .3. Enter the word to add, and then tap OK.Editing or deleting a word in the predictive text dictionaryYou can edit or remove words that you previously added to the predictive textdictionary.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Personal dictionary > Edit personal dictionary.§To edit a word, tap the word itself.§To delete words from the dictionary, press and tap Delete. Then choosethe words to remove and tap Delete.Backing up your personal dictionary to your storage cardIf you have a storage card installed, you can back up the new words you’ve added tothe predictive text dictionary.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary > Copy to storage card.3. When prompted, tap OK.145 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Importing your personal dictionary from your storage card1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary > Restore from storagecard.3. When prompted, tap OK.Entering text by speakingNo time to type? Try speaking the words to enter them in most text fields that let youuse the onscreen keyboard.§First make sure to select the language you’ll be using in the Voice input & outputsettings.§Since HTC Explorer uses Google’s speech-recognition service, you need to beconnected to the Internet to enter text by speaking.1. Press and hold the language key. HTC Explorer cues you to speak.2. Tell HTC Explorer what you want to be typed in.Setting the voice input language1. From the Home screen, press , then tap Settings > Voice input & output >Voice recognizer settings.2. Tap Language, then choose the language you want. Available languages depend on the voice input languages supported by Google.146 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Entering text by tracingInstead of tapping the keys on the onscreen keyboard, you can "trace" to type words.Trace keyboard in Settings > Language & keyboard > Touch Input > Tracekeyboard must be selected for you to use the Trace keyboard.To trace, slide your finger on the onscreen keyboard to enter words. For example, ifyou want to type “the”, put your finger on the “t” key, and then trace the word (bysliding your finger) “the” on the onscreen keyboard.Editing textIt's easy to cut, copy, and paste text using the keyboard.Some apps may offer their own way of selecting or copying text.Selecting textHighlight the text that you want to copy or cut.1. Press and hold the text field that contains the text to select until the magnifierappears. 2. Drag your finger to move the text cursor to a letter within the text that youwant to select.147 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. After positioning the text cursor, lift your finger. The text selection menu thenpops up.4. Do one of the following:§Tap Select word. When the word where you’ve placed the text cursor ishighlighted, drag the start and end markers to select the text you want.§Tap Select all to select everything in the text field.Copying and pasting text1. After you have selected the text you want to copy, tap Copy or Cut. Theselected text is then copied to the clipboard.2. Press and hold a text field in the same or other app until the magnifier appears.3. Drag your finger to move the text cursor to where you want to paste the text.4. After positioning the text cursor, lift your finger. The text selection menu thenpops up.5. Tap Paste.Adjusting input settingsOpen the Touch Input settings by doing one of the following:§From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.§On the onscreen keyboard, tap the language key (for example, tap if you’recurrently using the English onscreen keyboard). Then on the Internationalkeyboard options menu, tap Settings.You must have more than two keyboard languages selected before you can accessTouch Input settings using the language key.Keyboard types Select the keyboard layout to use.InternationalkeyboardAdd or remove languages from the onscreen keyboardlanguage list.Bilingual prediction Select a secondary keyboard language to use.Text input §Turn on or off predictive text, spell correction, and wordcompletion.§Enable audible or vibration feedback when typing.§Calibrate the touch keyboard accuracy.148 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Tutorial Learn how to use the onscreen keyboard with this interactivetutorial.Trace keyboard Turn on Trace keyboard and set options when tracing toenter text.Personal dictionary Add, edit, or remove words in the predictive text dictionary.149 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Internet connectionsData connectionWhen you turn on HTC Explorer for the first time, it will be automatically set up to useyour mobile operator's data connection (if the SIM card is inserted).Checking the data connection you're using1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Mobile networks > Network operators or Access Point Names.Turning the data connection on or offTurning your data connection off can help save battery life and save money on datacharges. However, if you don’t have data connection turned on and you’re also notconnected to a Wi-Fi network, you won’t receive automatic updates to your email,social network accounts, and other synchronized information.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Select the Mobile network check box to turn on the data connection; clear thecheck box to turn off the data connection.Adding a new access pointBefore you add another data connection, have the access point name and settings(including username and password if required) from your mobile operator ready.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Mobile networks > Access Point Names.3. On the APNs screen, press and then tap New APN.4. On the Edit access point screen, enter the APN settings. Tap an APN settingitem to edit it.5. Press and then tap Save.150 Internet connectionsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Enabling data roamingConnect to your mobile operator’s partner networks and access data services whenyou’re out of your mobile operator’s coverage area.Using data services while roaming will be costly. Check with your mobile operatorfor data roaming rates before you use data roaming.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Mobile networks, and then select the Data roaming check box.Select the Data roaming sound check box if you’d like HTC Explorer to play a soundso you’ll know when it’s connecting to a roaming network.Wi-FiTo use Wi-Fi, you need access to a wireless access point or “hotspot”. The availabilityand strength of the Wi-Fi signal will vary depending on objects, such as buildings orsimply a wall between rooms, the Wi-Fi signal has to pass through.Turning Wi-Fi on and connecting to a wireless network1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Select the Wi-Fi check box to turn Wi-Fi on. HTC Explorer then scans for available wireless networks.3. Tap Wi-Fi settings. Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed in the Wi-Fi networks section.If the wireless network that you want is not listed, tap Add Wi-Fi network tomanually add it.4. Tap the Wi-Fi network you want to connect to. If you selected a secured network, you'll be asked to enter the network key orpassword.5. Tap Connect.When HTC Explorer is connected to the wireless network, the Wi-Fi icon appearsin the status bar and tells you the approximate signal strength (number of bands thatlight up).The next time HTC Explorer connects to a previously accessed secured wirelessnetwork, you won’t be asked to enter the key or other security information again,unless you reset HTC Explorer to its factory default settings.151 Internet connectionsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Connecting to a Wi-Fi network with EAP-TLS securityYou may need to install a network certificate (*.p12) to HTC Explorer before you canconnect to a Wi-Fi network with EAP-TLS authentication protocol.1. Save the certificate file to the root folder of the storage card.2. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Security.3. Tap Install from SD card.4. Select the network certificate needed to connect to the EAP-TLS network.5. Turn on Wi-Fi and connect to a wireless network.Checking the wireless network status1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. On the Wireless & networks screen, tap Wi-Fi settings, and then tap the wirelessnetwork that HTC Explorer is currently connected to.A message box is then displayed showing the Wi-Fi network name, status, speed,signal strength, and more.If you want to remove the settings for this network, tap Forget. If you want toreconnect to a wireless network that you have removed, you'll need to choose thewireless network from the list of available Wi-Fi networks again. If it is a securedwireless network, you'll need to enter the wireless network credentials again.Connecting to another Wi-Fi network1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Wi-Fi settings. Detected Wi-Fi networks are displayed in the Wi-Finetworks section.3. To manually scan for available Wi-Fi networks, on the Wi-Fi screen, press ,and then tap Scan.4. Tap another Wi-Fi network to connect to it.Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN)Add, set up, and manage virtual private networks (VPNs) so you can connect andaccess resources inside a secured local network, such as your corporate network.Depending on the type of VPN you’re using at work, you may be asked to enter yourlogin credentials and install security certificates before you can connect to yourcompany’s local network. You can get this information from your networkadministrator.Also, HTC Explorer must first establish a Wi-Fi or data connection before you canstart a VPN connection.152 Internet connectionsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting up secure credential storageIf your network administrator tells you to download and install security certificates,you must first set up secure credential storage on HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Security.2. Tap Set password.3. Enter a new password for the credential storage.4. Scroll down and confirm the password, and then tap OK.5. Select the Use secure credentials check box.You can then download and install the certificates needed to access your localnetwork. Your network administrator can tell you how to do this.Adding a VPN connection1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap VPN settings > Add VPN, and then tap the type of VPN you want to add.3. Tap the VPN settings and set them up according to the security details yournetwork administrator gave you.4. Press , and then tap Save.The VPN is then added to the VPNs section of the VPN settings screen.Connecting to a VPN1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap VPN settings.3. In the VPNs section, tap the VPN that you want to connect to.4. When asked, enter your log in credentials, and then tap Connect. When you’reconnected, the VPN connected icon appears in the notification area of thetitle bar.You can then open the web browser to access resources such as your corporatenetwork intranet.Disconnecting from a VPN1. Press and hold the title bar, and then slide down your finger to open theNotifications panel.2. Tap the VPN connection to return to the VPN settings screen, and then tap theVPN connection to disconnect from it.When HTC Explorer has disconnected from the VPN, the VPN disconnected icon isdisplayed in the notification area of the title bar.153 Internet connectionsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using HTC Explorer as a modem(USB tethering)No Internet connection available for your computer? No problem. Use the Internetconnection of HTC Explorer to connect to the Internet.§You need your SIM card inserted on HTC Explorer to use the data connection.§To use HTC Explorer as a modem, you need to install HTC Sync on your computerfirst.§You must have an approved data plan associated with your account from yourmobile service provider to use this service.1. Make sure the data connection on HTC Explorer is turned on.2. Connect HTC Explorer to the computer using the provided USB cable.3. On the Choose a connection type screen, select USB tethering, and then tapDone.Connecting HTC Explorer to the Internetthrough a computer (Internet Pass-through)If you temporarily don’t have Internet access, you can still go online on HTC Explorerby using your computer’s Internet connection.Before you can use your computer as a modem, be sure to install HTC Sync onyour computer first.1. Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet. Two things to check for your computer’s Internet connection. One, you may needto turn off your local network’s firewall. Two, if your computer connects to theInternet via PPP (e.g. Dial UP, xDSL, or VPN), Internet Pass-through will onlysupport TCP protocol.2. Connect HTC Explorer to the computer using the provided USB cable.3. On the Choose a connection type screen, select Internet pass-through, and thentap Done.154 Internet connectionsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
BluetoothBluetooth basicsTurning Bluetooth on or off1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Select or clear the Bluetooth check box.An even easier way to turn Bluetooth on or off is with the Bluetooth widget on theHome screen.Turn off Bluetooth when not in use to save battery power, or in places where usinga wireless device is prohibited, such as on board an aircraft and in hospitals.Changing the device nameThe device name identifies HTC Explorer to other devices.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.4. Tap Device name.5. Enter the new name for HTC Explorer in the dialog box, and then tap OK.Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kitYou can listen to music over a Bluetooth stereo headset, or have hands-freeconversations using a compatible Bluetooth headset or car kit. It’s the sameprocedure to set up stereo audio and hands-free.§For you to listen to music with your headset or car kit, the headset or car kit mustsupport the A2DP Bluetooth profile.§Before you connect your headset, you need to make it discoverable soHTC Explorer can find it. You can find out how to do this by referring to yourheadset manual.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.155 BluetoothHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Make sure that the headset is discoverable.5. Tap Scan for devices. HTC Explorer will start to scan for Bluetooth deviceswithin range.6. When you see the name of your headset displayed in the Bluetooth devicessection, tap the name. HTC Explorer then automatically tries to pair with theheadset.7. If automatic pairing fails, enter the passcode supplied with your headset.The pairing and connection status is displayed below the hands-free headset or car kitname in the Bluetooth devices section. When the Bluetooth headset or car kit isconnected to HTC Explorer, the Bluetooth connected icon is displayed in thestatus bar. Depending on the type of headset or car kit you have connected, you canthen start using the headset or car kit.Reconnecting a headset or car kitNormally, you can easily reconnect your headset by switching on Bluetooth onHTC Explorer, and then turning on the headset. However, you might have to connectmanually if your headset has been used with another Bluetooth device.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.4. Make sure that the headset is discoverable.5. Tap the headset’s name in the Bluetooth devices section.6. If prompted to enter a passcode, try 0000 or 1234, or consult the headset/carkit documentation to find the passcode.If you still cannot reconnect to the headset or car kit, follow the instructions in Unpairing from a Bluetooth device on page 157, and then follow the steps under Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kit on page 155.Disconnecting or unpairing from a BluetoothdeviceDisconnecting a Bluetooth device1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.3. In the Bluetooth devices section, press and hold the device to disconnect.4. Tap Disconnect.156 BluetoothHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Unpairing from a Bluetooth deviceYou can make HTC Explorer forget its pairing connection with another Bluetoothdevice. Doing so may require you to enter or confirm a passcode again if you want toreconnect to the other device.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.3. In the Bluetooth devices section, press and hold the device to unpair.4. Tap Disconnect & unpair, or tap Unpair if the Bluetooth device is currently notconnected to HTC Explorer.Sending information using BluetoothYou can use Bluetooth to send information from HTC Explorer to another Bluetoothenabled device such as a phone or notebook computer. You can send the followingtypes of information, depending on the device you are sending to:§Images and videos§Calendar events§Contacts§Audio filesBefore you begin, set the receiving device to discoverable mode. You may alsoneed to set it to “Receive Beams” or “Receive Files”. Refer to the device’sdocumentation for instructions on receiving information over Bluetooth.1. On HTC Explorer, open the app that contains the information or file you want tosend.2. Follow the steps for the type of item you want to send:Captured photo orvideoAfter capturing, on the Camera preview screen, tap ,and then tap Bluetooth.Photos or videos 1. On the Gallery app, choose an album.2. Tap > Bluetooth.3. Choose the photos and videos you want to share, andthen tap Next.Contact 1. On the People app, tap a contact to view the contact'sdetails.2. Press and then tap Send contact.3. Tap the down arrow icon, and then select Bluetooth.4. Choose which details to share, and then tap Send.157 BluetoothHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Calendarappointment oreventIn Day view, Agenda view, or Week view, press and holdthe event, and then tap Forward > Bluetooth.Music track 1. With the track displayed on the Music app’s Now playingscreen, tap > Share > Share file.2. Tap Bluetooth.Voice recording On the main Voice Recorder screen, tap , and then tapBluetooth.3. Turn on Bluetooth if you’re asked to do so.4. If you haven't paired with the receiving device before, tap Scan for devices.5. Tap the name of the receiving device.6. If prompted, accept the pairing request on HTC Explorer and on the receivingdevice. Also enter the same passcode or confirm the auto-generated passcodeon both devices.7. On the receiving device, accept the file.Where sent information is savedWhen you send information using Bluetooth, the location where it's saved depends onthe type of information and the receiving device.If you send a calendar event or contact, it is normally added directly to thecorresponding application on the receiving device. For example, if you send acalendar event to a compatible phone, the event is shown in that phone’s calendarapplication.If you send another file type to a Windows computer, it is normally saved in theBluetooth Exchange folder within your personal document folders.§On Windows XP, the path may be: C:\Documents and Settings\[yourusername]\My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange§On Windows Vista, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\Documents§On Windows 7, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange FolderIf you send a file to another device, the saved location may depend on the file type.For example, if you send an image file to another mobile phone, it may be saved in afolder named “Images”.Receiving information using BluetoothHTC Explorer lets you receive various files with Bluetooth, including photos, musictracks, and documents such as PDFs.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.158 BluetoothHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.4. Select the Discoverable check box.5. On the sending device, send one or more files to HTC Explorer. Refer to thedevice’s documentation for instructions on sending information over Bluetooth.6. If asked, accept the pairing request on HTC Explorer and on the receivingdevice. Also enter the same passcode or confirm the auto-generated passcodeon both devices. You'll then get a Bluetooth authorization request.7. If you want to automatically receive files from the sending device in future,select the Always check box.8. Tap Accept or OK.9. When HTC Explorer receives a file transfer request notification, slide down theNotifications panel, tap the incoming file notification, and then tap Accept.10. When a file is transferred, a notification is displayed. To open the fileimmediately, slide down the Notifications panel, and then tap the relevantnotification.When you open a received file, what happens next depends on the file type:§Media files and documents are usually opened directly in a compatible app. Forexample, if you open a music track, it starts playing in the Music app.§For a vCalendar file, choose the calendar where you want to save the event, andthen tap Import. The vCalendar is added to your Calendar events.§For a vCard contact file, you can choose to import one, several, or all of thosecontacts to your contacts list.Adding the Bluetooth received folder to the Home screenYou can add a folder to the Home screen that shows all files you have received withBluetooth.1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Personalize.2. On the Personalize screen, tap Folder > Bluetooth received.3. Press and hold the Bluetooth received folder icon, and drag it to the Homescreen position you want.To view the folder contents, tap the folder icon. To open a file, tap the file name.159 BluetoothHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
SecurityProtecting your SIM card with a PINAdd another layer of security for HTC Explorer by assigning a PIN (personalidentification number) to your SIM.Make sure you have the default SIM PIN provided by your mobile operator beforecontinuing.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Security.2. Tap Set up SIM card lock, then select Lock SIM card.3. Enter the default SIM card PIN, and then tap OK.4. To change the SIM card PIN, tap Change SIM PIN.Restoring a SIM card that has been locked outIf you enter the wrong PIN more times than the maximum number of attemptsallowed, your SIM card will become “PUK-locked.”You need a PUK code to restore access to HTC Explorer. This code may have beenprovided by your mobile operator when you received your SIM card.1. On the Phone dialer screen, enter the PUK code, and then tap Next.2. Enter the new PIN you want to use, and then tap Next.3. Enter the new PIN again, and then tap OK.Protecting HTC Explorer with a screen lockpattern, PIN, or passwordProtect your personal information and prevent others from using HTC Explorerwithout your permission by setting a screen lock pattern, PIN or password.Your screen lock will be asked every time HTC Explorer is turned on or when it’s idlefor a certain period of time.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Security.2. Tap Set up screen lock.160 SecurityHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap one of the following:None Disable the screen lock you’ve previously created.Pattern Set a screen lock pattern by following the onscreen instructions.PIN Set a numeric password of at least four digits.Password Set an alpha-numeric password.4. On the Security screen, tap Lock phone after, then specify the idle time you canallow before the screen is locked. You can also clear the Use visible pattern or Visible passwords on the Securityscreen if you don’t want your screen lock to display as you enter it onscreen.Changing your screen lock1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Security.2. Tap Change screen lock.3. Enter your current screen lock to confirm that you want to change it.4. Choose a different screen lock type, then enter your new pattern, PIN, orpassword. Or tap None if you don’t want to use a screen lock.Forgot your screen lock pattern?If you’ve forgotten your screen lock pattern, you have up to five attempts totry and unlock HTC Explorer.If this fails, you can unlock HTC Explorer by entering your Google Accountuser name and password.1. On the unlock screen, enter your lock pattern.2. After the fifth attempt, when you’re asked to wait for 30 seconds, tapOK.3. If the display goes off, press the POWER button to turn the display backon, and then unlock the screen.4. Tap the Forgot pattern? button when it appears.5. Enter your Google Account name and password, and then tap Sign in.You’ll then be asked to create a new screen lock pattern. If you nolonger want to do so, tap Cancel.161 SecurityHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Encrypting data on HTC ExplorerYou can encrypt data on HTC Explorer such as your online accounts, settings, andother information.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap SD & phone storage.3. Under Internal storage, tap Storage encryption.4. Set a password, and then tap OK. The encryption process starts.If you want to stop encrypting new information on HTC Explorer, deselect the Storageencryption checkbox.162 SecurityHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
SettingsSettings on HTC ExplorerControl and customize phone settings on the Settings screen.From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.Personalize Make HTC Explorer truly yours with the various personalizationoptions available.Wireless &networksSet up wireless connections, such as Wi-Fi, data connection, andBluetooth, enable Airplane mode, and more.Call Set up call services such as voicemail, call forwarding, call waiting,and caller ID.Sound §Choose sounds to use for the ringtones and notifications.§Adjust media playback volume.§Set to lower the ring volume when you move HTC Explorer whenit’s ringing, make it ring louder when inside a bag or pocket, andturn on the speakerphone when you flip it over.Display Set up display settings such as automatic screen orientation,brightness, screen timeout, and more.Accounts &sync§Log in or out of your social network accounts, Google Account,and Exchange ActiveSync account.§Sign in or out of your HTCSense.com account.§You can also manage synchronization and other settings for youraccounts.Location §Select the sources to use when determining your location.§Select Phone finder so you can use HTCSense.com to locateHTC Explorer.Search Select items to include when you do a search and set Googlesearch options.Privacy §Choose to automatically back up some settings (e.g. Wi-Fipasswords or Bookmarks) to Google servers using your GoogleAccount so you can restore them when needed.§If you don't want missed calls and your received text messageappear on the lock screen, clear the Display message text checkbox.163 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Connect to PC §Set the default USB connection type to use whenever youconnect HTC Explorer to your computer.§Or, select the Ask me check box to set HTC Explorer to alwaysdisplay the screen for selecting the USB connection type.Security Set a screen lock, enable the SIM card lock, or manage thecredential storage.Power §Turn on power saver to automatically switch to power savingmode when the battery level goes down to the level that you set.§Another power saving option is to select Enable sleep mode. Thiswill turn off auto sync of data in your online accounts.Applications §Manage running applications, move applications to or from thestorage card, check how much storage is used by apps, and installor uninstall programs.§Choose how much free memory remains before you're notifiedabout low memory space.SD & phonestorage§Check the available space in the internal storage and your storagecard.§From this screen, be sure to unmount your storage card beforeyou remove it from HTC Explorer.§Erase the storage card to start afresh and if you don't need tokeep the content. You need to unmount the storage card firstbefore you can erase it.§Clear out the cache used by apps, move apps or uninstall apps ifHTC Explorer is running low on memory.§You can also do a factory reset.Date & time §Set the date and time, time zone, and date or time format.§Choose the time and date formats that suit you.Language &keyboardSet the operating system language and region. You can also setonscreen keyboard options.Accessibility Use these settings when you’ve downloaded and installed anaccessibility tool, such as a screen reader that provides voicefeedback. You can turn accessibility functions or services on or off.164 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Voice input &outputSet up the voice input options. Also, if you’ve installed a text-to-speech (voice data) application, use this to set the text-to-speechsettings.About phone §Turn on or off scheduled checks for system software updates, ormanually check for updates.§Turn Tell HTC on or off. When enabled, you're helping us know ifHTC Explorer encounters a technical problem.§View different information about HTC Explorer, such as themobile network type, signal strength, battery level, and more.Changing display settingsAdjusting the screen brightness manually1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Display > Brightness.3. Clear the Automatic brightness check box.4. Drag the brightness slider to the left to decrease or to the right to increase thescreen brightness.5. Tap OK.Adjusting the time before the screen turns offAfter a period of inactivity, the screen turns off to conserve battery power. You canset the idle time before the screen turns off.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Display > Screen timeout.3. Tap the time before the screen turns off.Turning automatic screen rotation offBy default, the screen orientation automatically adjusts depending on how you holdHTC Explorer.Automatic rotation is not supported in all application screens.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Display.3. Clear the Auto-rotate screen check box.165 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Recalibrating the G-sensorRecalibrate the screen if you feel that the screen orientation does not respondproperly to the way you hold HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Display > G-Sensor calibration.3. Place HTC Explorer on a flat and level surface, and then tap Calibrate.4. After the recalibration process, tap OK.Keeping the screen on while charging HTC ExplorerYou can keep the screen from turning off while you’re charging HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Applications > Development.3. Select the Stay awake check box.Switching animation effects on or offYou can turn off the animation or enable only some animations when switchingbetween screens.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Display > Animation.3. On the options menu, select the animation setting you want.Changing sound settingsSwitching between silent, vibration, and normal modesDo one of the following:§To change back from silent to normal mode, simply press the VOLUME UPbutton.§To change back from vibration to normal mode, press the VOLUME UP buttontwice.§From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Sound > Sound profile.Enabling or disabling audible selectionYou can choose to play a sound when you’re selecting items onscreen.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Sound.3. Select or clear the Audible selection check box.166 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Lowering the ring volume automaticallyHTC Explorer has a quiet ring feature that automatically lowers the ring volume whenyou move it.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Sound.3. Select or clear the Quiet ring on pickup check box.Making HTC Explorer ring louder with Pocket modeTo help avoid missing incoming calls when HTC Explorer is in your pocket or bag, thepocket mode feature gradually increases the ring volume and vibrates when youreceive a call. When not in your pocket or bag, HTC Explorer will ring at the normalvolume you set.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Sound.3. Select or clear the Pocket mode check box.Switching to speakerphone automaticallyWhen you're on a call, you can switch to speakerphone by simply flippingHTC Explorer over.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Sound.3. Select or clear the Flip for speaker check box.Changing the languageWhen you turn HTC Explorer on for the first time, you’re asked to choose thelanguage you want to use. If you want, you can still change the language after you setup HTC Explorer. Changing the language adjusts the keyboard layout, date and timeformatting, and more.The languages available to choose from may depend on the version of HTC Exploreryou have.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Language & keyboard > Select language.167 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap the language and corresponding region you want to use.4. Press to return to the Home screen. The new language will be applied after afew seconds.Optimizing battery lifeYou can set HTC Explorer to automatically switch to power saver mode when thebattery level reaches a certain level.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Power.3. Tap Power mode > Economy.4. Tap Turn power saver on at, and then select when to switch to power savermode.5. Tap Economy mode settings, and then set and select the behavior whenHTC Explorer switches to power saver mode.Switching to GSM network modeSwitch to using GSM network if you’re not using a data connection to connect to theInternet. Connecting to GSM network mode consumes less battery power.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Wireless & networks > Mobile networks > Network Mode.3. Tap GSM only.Checking the power usage of applications1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap About phone > Battery > Battery use.168 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Scheduling HTC Explorer to switch to Sleep modeSet the Sleep mode schedule on HTC Explorer so it doesn't consume too muchbattery power when it's not plugged in at night.Unlike the usual Sleep mode when you press the POWER button to turn off thescreen display, a scheduled Sleep mode turns off the Wi-Fi and data connectionsduring the Sleep mode schedule you defined.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Power > Enable sleep mode.3. Tap any of the following:Automatic Select to automatically switch HTC Explorer to Sleep mode.HTC Explorer adjusts its Sleep mode schedule over a period oftime around what it detects as your bedtime.Manual Select to specify the Sleep mode start and end time.Never Select to turn scheduled Sleep mode off.Managing memoryChecking how much phone memory is available for use1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap SD & phone storage. The available phone memory is displayed in theInternal storage section.Checking the available storage card space1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap SD & phone storage. The total and available storage card space is displayedin the SD card section.Making more storage spaceEasily free up some storage by cleaning up the application cache, moving oruninstalling apps, and deleting old mails and messages all in one go.You cannot move or uninstall preinstalled apps.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap SD & phone storage > Make more space.169 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. On the Clear caches screen, choose whether to clear the cache of rarely usedapps only or all apps, and then tap Next.4. On the Application storage screen:§Tap Move apps to SD card if there are apps that you can transfer to thestorage card.§Tap Uninstall apps if there are apps you'd like to remove.5. Tap Next.6. On the Mail & message storage screen:§Set fewer days of mails to download so that older mails will be removedfrom the storage automatically.§Lower the number of text and multimedia messages per conversation.7. Tap Finish.Clearing application cache and data1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.3. On the All tab, tap an application.4. On the screen, tap Clear data and/or Clear cache.Uninstalling third-party applicationsYou cannot uninstall applications that are preinstalled on HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.3. On the Downloaded tab, tap the application you want to uninstall.4. Tap Uninstall.Moving applications to or from the storage cardMove downloaded applications to the storage card if the internal storage onHTC Explorer is getting low. Or, if your storage card is getting full, you can also moveapplications from the storage card to the internal storage.You can only move applications that are not preinstalled on HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.3. On the Downloaded tab, tap the application you want to move.4. Tap Move to SD card or Move to phone.170 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Stopping running applications using Task ManagerUse Task Manager to free up memory by stopping running applications that you'renot currently using.1. From the Home screen, tap > Task Manager.2. In the All applications list, tap to the right of the application name to stop it.Checking information about HTC Explorer1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap About phone.3. Select one of the following:SoftwareupdatesEnable or disable the automatic check feature for softwareupdates for HTC Explorer. You can also tap Check now tomanually check for software updates.Tell HTC Turn Tell HTC on or off. When enabled, you’re helping usknow if HTC Explorer encounters a technical problem. Youcan also choose when you want to send error reports.Network Check information about your mobile network and itsservice status.Phone identity Check information about HTC Explorer and the SIM cardyou’re using.Battery Check information about the battery such as its currentbattery level, status, and what programs are using thebattery.HardwareinformationCheck the Wi-Fi MAC and Bluetooth addresses.SoftwareinformationCheck the version and other information about the Androidplatform being used by HTC Explorer. You can also checkthe version of the web browser.LegalinformationRead legal information from HTC and Google, and licensesused by HTC Explorer.171 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Update and resetSoftware updatesFrom time to time, software updates for HTC Explorer may be available. HTC Explorercan check and then notify you if there’s a new update. You can then download andinstall the software update using the Wi-Fi or data connection. You can also manuallycheck if there's an available software update.Depending on the type of update, the update may erase all your personal data andcustomized settings, and also remove any applications you’ve installed. Make sure thatyou’ve backed up the information and files you want to keep.Checking and downloading software updates may incur extra data fees.Installing an updateWhen the Internet connection is on and there's a new update available, the systemupdate dialog box appears and guides you through the process.1. If you don't see the dialog box, check for the update notification icon in thestatus bar. Slide open the Notifications panel, and then tap the update notification.2. In the system update dialog box, choose what type of connection to use fordownloading the update. Follow the onscreen prompts to start the download.3. After the download is complete, tap Install now and then tap OK in the Installsystem software update dialog box.Wait for the update to finish. HTC Explorer will then restart automatically.Checking for updates manually1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap About phone > Software updates > Check now.172 Update and resetHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Restarting HTC ExplorerIf HTC Explorer is running slower than normal, an application is not performingproperly, or HTC Explorer becomes unresponsive, try restarting HTC Explorer and seeif that helps solve the problem.1. If the display is off, press the POWER button to turn it back on.2. Unlock the display.3. Press and hold the POWER button, and then tap Restart.4. When asked to confirm, tap Restart. If these steps don't work, you can remove and replace the battery, and then turnHTC Explorer on to restart it.Resetting HTC ExplorerDo a factory reset to return HTC Explorer to its original state before the first time youturned it on.If you’re passing HTC Explorer on to someone else or HTC Explorer has a persistentproblem that cannot be solved, you can perform a factory reset (also called a hardreset). Factory reset is not a step to be taken lightly. It’ll permanently delete all yourdata and customized settings, and will remove any applications you’ve downloadedand installed. Be sure to back up any data and files you want to keep before you do afactory reset.Performing a factory reset via settingsThe most convenient way to do a factory reset is via the settings.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap SD & phone storage > Factory data reset.3. Tap Reset phone, and then tap Erase everything.Performing a factory reset using hardware buttonsIf you can’t turn HTC Explorer on or access settings, you can still perform a factoryreset by using the hardware buttons on HTC Explorer.1. Remove the battery, wait for a few seconds, then reinsert the battery.2. Press and hold the VOLUME DOWN button, and then briefly press the POWERbutton.3. Wait for the screen with the three Android images to appear, and then releasethe VOLUME DOWN button.4. Press VOLUME DOWN to select FACTORY RESET, and then press the POWERbutton.173 Update and resetHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Trademarks and copyrights©2011 HTC Corporation. All Rights Reserved.HTC, the HTC logo, the HTC quietly brilliant logo, HTC Explorer, HTC Sense, and HTCSync are trademarks or service marks of HTC Corporation.©2011 Google Inc. Used with permission. Google, the Google logo, Android, theAndroid logo, Android Market, the Android Market logo, Google Apps, GoogleCalendar, Google Checkout, Google Earth, Google Latitude, Google Maps, GoogleTalk, Gmail, Picasa, and YouTube are trademarks of Google Inc.Microsoft, Windows, ActiveSync, Outlook, Windows Media, and Windows Vista areeither registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the UnitedStates and/or other countries.Bluetooth and the Bluetooth logo are trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.This device contains Adobe® Flash® Player software under license from AdobeSystems Incorporated. Copyright ©1995–2011 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rightsreserved. Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.microSD is a trademark of SD Card Association.Facebook is a trademark of Facebook, Inc.iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc.All other company, product and service names mentioned herein are trademarks,registered trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.HTC shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein,nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from furnishing this material.The information is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind and is subject tochange without notice. HTC also reserves the right to revise the content of thisdocument at any time without prior notice.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by anymeans, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or storing in aretrieval system, or translated into any language in any form without prior writtenpermission of HTC.174 Trademarks and copyrightsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
IndexSymbols3G 150AAirplane mode 48Alarm 96Android Market 93Apps- deleting 94- installing 93, 138BBack up contacts 66Battery- installing 13- optimizing battery life 168Bluetooth- connecting a Bluetooth headset orcar kit 155- disconnecting or unpairing 156- sending information 157- sharing music 92- turning on or off 155Browser- bookmarks 53- navigating and zooming 51- opening a new window 51- options 54- using 50CCalendar- creating an event 122- managing events 124- reminders 126- settings 126- views 123- widget 127Call history 45Camera- basics 78- effects 80- recording a video 80- taking a photo 79- zooming 79Change phone language 167Sound- audible selection 166- lowering ring volumeautomatically 167- Pocket mode 167- switching profiles 166- switching to speakerphone 167Clock 95Conference call 43Contacts- adding 63- copying from SIM card 62- deleting 67Copying text 26DData connection- access point 150- turning on or off 150Delete apps 94Delete contacts 67Display- adjusting screen brightness 165- changing the time before the screenturns off 165- recalibrating G-sensor 166- turning off screen rotation 165Downloading- from Web 52- viewing downloads 53EEmail 113Exchange ActiveSync- Out of office 121175 IndexHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
- sending a meeting request 121- working with Exchange ActiveSyncemail 120FFacebook- sharing your location 75Facebook for HTC Sense 73Factory reset 173Firmware 172Flight mode 48FM Radio 100GGallery- about 82- editing photos 84- sending photos and videos 85- sharing photos and videos 86- viewing photos 83- viewing photos in social networks 88- watching video 84Getting started 8Gmail 112Google Account 56Google Maps 128HHands free 155Hard reset 173Headphones 155Home dialing 46Home screen- about 17- adding widgets 30- extended 17- rearranging items 32- rearranging the home panels 33HTC Clock- Desk Clock 95- setting an alarm 96- World Clock 95HTCSense.com 140IIcons- notification icons 22- status icons 21Internet calling 44Internet connection- data connection 150- Internet pass-through 154- Tethering 154- VPN 152- Wi-Fi 151Internet pass-through 154KKeyboard- copying and pasting text 148- dictionary 145- editing text 147- entering text 143- entering text by speaking 146- predictive text 144- selecting text 147LLanguage 167Leap view 18Locations- turning on location services 128MMail- adding a POP3/IMAP account 114- adding an Exchange account 114- deleting an email account 121- managing email messages 117- sending 117- sorting email messages 116- unified inbox 115- working with Exchange ActiveSyncemail 120Making a call 38Managing memory 169Market 93Master reset 173Meeting request 121Messages- copying to the SIM card 109176 IndexHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
- deleting 109- deleting a conversation 110- forwarding 107- protecting from deletion 109- viewing 106microSD card 12MMS 104Modem- USB tethering 154- using your computer 154Multimedia message 104Music- browsing the library 90- copying music to storage card 25- listening 89- playing music from Lock screen 89- playlist 90- setting a song as ringtone 92- sharing music using Bluetooth 92- widget 90NNotifications- icons 21- panel 23OOnline accounts- about 56- managing 57Onscreen keyboard- copying and pasting text 148- dictionary 145- editing text 147- entering text 143- entering text by speaking 146- predictive text 144- selecting text 147- settings 148Optimizing battery life 168PPair a Bluetooth device 155People- adding a new contact 63- deleting contacts 67- editing a contact 67- filtering your contacts 61- groups 69- merging contact information 65- searching for a contact 63- widget 71Phone calls- calling a number in a message 40- calling a number in an email 40- calling using Wi-Fi 44- making an emergency call 40- receiving 41- setting up a conference call 43Phone information 171Phone settings- About phone 171- Applications 169- Display 165- Language & keyboard 167- Power 168- SD & phone storage 169- Sound 166Phone updates 172Photos- copying to/from storage card 25- editing 84- sharing 86- viewing 83Playing music from the Lock screen 89PUK (PIN Unblock Key) 160QQuick Settings 24RRadio 100Record your voice 101Ring volume- lowering ring volumeautomatically 167- making your phone ring louder 167Ringtone- setting 92SScenes 28Screen- adjusting screen brightness 165177 IndexHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
- changing the time before the screenturns off 165- recalibrating G-sensor 166- turning off screen rotation 165SD card 12Search 49, 50Security- changing your screen lock 161- locking with a screen lock pattern,PIN, or password 160- locking your SIM card with a PIN 160Settings- About phone 171- Applications 169- Language & keyboard 167- Power 168- SD & phone storage 169- Sound 166Sharing- games and apps 102SIM card- copying a message 109- inserting 11- removing 11- SIM PIN 160Sleep mode 20Slideshow 83Smart dial 39SMS 103Social networks- adding 57- viewing photos 88Software update 172Sound set 34Speakerphone 43Speed dial 39Storage card- copying files 25- moving apps to the storage card 170Sync- online accounts 58TTethering 154Text message 103Translate 50UUpdating phone software 172Upgrade 172USB 25, 154VVideos- recording 80- sharing 86- watching 84Voice input 146Voice Recorder 101Volume- adjusting during phone calls 19- adjusting media 19- adjusting ringer 19VPN- adding a connection 153- connecting 153WWallpaper- changing 29Weather- adding cities 98- checking weather 98Web browser 50Wi-Fi- calling 44- connecting to another network 152- network status 152- turning on 151Widgets- adding 30- changing settings 31- removing 33YYouTube- sharing videos 87178 IndexHTC Confidential 2011/09/16

user manual 1 of 2.

Your HTC ExplorerUser guideHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
ContentsGetting startedInside the box 8HTC Explorer 8Back cover 10SIM card 11Storage card 12Battery 13Switching the power on or off 14Entering your PIN 15Finger gestures 15Setting up HTC Explorer for the first time 16Ways of getting contacts into HTC Explorer 16Home screen 17BasicsAdjusting the volume 19Sleep mode 20Status and notifications 21Notifications panel 23Connecting HTC Explorer to a computer 25Copying files to or from the storage card 25Copying text, looking up information, and sharing 26PersonalizingMaking HTC Explorer truly yours 28Personalizing HTC Explorer with scenes 28Changing your wallpaper 29Applying a new skin 30Personalizing your Home screen with widgets 30Adding icons and other shortcuts on your Home screen 31Adding folders on your Home screen 32Rearranging or removing widgets and icons on your Home screen 32Rearranging the Home screen 33Customizing the shortcuts on the lock screen 33Using sound sets 34Rearranging or hiding application tabs 35Shortcuts & Clock widget 36Phone callsDifferent ways of making calls 38Making a call on the Phone dialer screen 38Using Speed dial 392 ContentsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Calling a phone number in a text message 40Calling a phone number in an email 40Calling a phone number in a Calendar event 40Making an emergency call 40Receiving calls 41What can I do during a call? 42Setting up a conference call 43Internet calls 44Using Call history 45Using Home dialing 46Call services 47Turning Airplane mode on or off 48Search and Web browserSearching HTC Explorer and the Web 49Using the web browser 50Downloading from the Web 52Viewing bookmarks and previously visited pages 53Setting browser options 54Accounts and syncAbout online accounts 56Synchronizing with a Google Account 56Adding a social network account 57Managing your online accounts 57PeopleTransferring contacts from your old phone 59About the People app 60Your contacts list 61Setting up your profile 62Importing contacts from your SIM card 62Adding a new contact 63Searching for contacts 63Importing a contact from an Exchange ActiveSync account 64Merging contact information 65Backing up your contacts to the storage card 66Contact information and conversations 66Sending contact information as a vCard 68Contact groups 69Adding People widgets 71SocialFacebook for HTC Sense 73Enjoying Facebook in Friend Stream 74Chatting in Google Talk 75CameraCamera basics 78Taking a photo 79Recording video 803 ContentsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Adding effects 80After capturing 80Changing camera settings 81Photos, videos, and musicGallery 82Music 89Android Market and other appsFinding and installing apps from Android Market 93Using the Clock 95Checking Weather 98Watching videos on YouTube 99Listening to FM Radio 100Recording your voice 101Sharing games and apps 102MessagesOpening Messages 103Sending a text message (SMS) 103Sending a multimedia message (MMS) 104Resuming a draft message 106Viewing and replying to a message 106Forwarding a message 107Viewing and saving an attachment from a multimedia message 108Push messages 108Managing message conversations 109Backing up your text messages to the storage card 110Setting message options 111EmailGmail 112Mail 113CalendarAbout Calendar 122Creating an event 122Changing Calendar views 123Managing Calendar events 124Accepting or declining a meeting invitation 125Dismissing or snoozing event reminders 126Showing or hiding calendars 126Changing Calendar settings 126About the Calendar widget 127Maps and locationLocation settings 128Google Maps 1284 ContentsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
HTC SyncAbout HTC Sync 133Installing HTC Sync 133Setting up HTC Sync to recognize HTC Explorer 134Getting to know the workspace 134Setting up synchronization 135Synchronizing HTC Explorer 138Installing an app from your computer to HTC Explorer 138Synchronizing another device with your computer 139Downloading the latest HTC Sync upgrade 139HTCSense.comSigning up for your HTCSense.com account 140Turning on Device finder 140Using HTCSense.com 141Deleting your HTCSense.com account 142KeyboardUsing the onscreen keyboard 143Entering words with predictive text 144Entering text by speaking 146Entering text by tracing 147Editing text 147Adjusting input settings 148Internet connectionsData connection 150Wi-Fi 151Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN) 152Using HTC Explorer as a modem (USB tethering) 154Connecting HTC Explorer to the Internet through a computer (Internet Pass-through) 154BluetoothBluetooth basics 155Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kit 155Disconnecting or unpairing from a Bluetooth device 156Sending information using Bluetooth 157Receiving information using Bluetooth 158SecurityProtecting your SIM card with a PIN 160Protecting HTC Explorer with a screen lock pattern, PIN, or password 160Encrypting data on HTC Explorer 162SettingsSettings on HTC Explorer 163Changing display settings 165Changing sound settings 166Changing the language 1675 ContentsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Optimizing battery life 168Managing memory 169Checking information about HTC Explorer 171Update and resetSoftware updates 172Restarting HTC Explorer 173Resetting HTC Explorer 173Trademarks and copyrightsIndex6 ContentsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Conventions used in this guideIn this user guide, we use the following symbols to indicate useful and importantinformation:This is a note. A note often gives additional information, such as what happenswhen you choose to do or not to do a certain action. A note also providesinformation that may only be applicable to some situations.This is a tip. A tip gives you an alternative way to do a particular step or procedure,or lets you know of an option that you may find helpful.This indicates important information that you need in order to accomplish a certaintask or to get a feature to work properly.This provides safety precaution information, that is, information that you need to becareful about to prevent potential problems.7 Conventions used in this guideHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Getting startedInside the boxYou will find the following inside the box:§HTC Explorer§Battery§USB cable§Power adapter§Quick start guide§Safety and regulatory guideHTC ExplorerFront panel1. Home 2. Menu 3. Back 4. Search 5. Microphone6. Touch screen7. Earpiece8 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Left and right panels1. USB connector2. VOLUME controlsBack panel1. 3 megapixel camera2. SpeakerTop panel1. 3.5mm headset jack2. POWER9 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Back coverRemoving the back coverRemove the back cover to access the battery compartment, SIM card slot, andstorage card slot.1. Turn off HTC Explorer and hold it securely upside down with the front facingaway from you.2. With your fingers, pry the bottom of the back cover away from the phone whilepressing in with your thumb against the middle of the back cover. Replacing the back cover1. Insert the top half of the phone into the top of the back cover. 2. Press the bottom part of the back cover towards the phone to lock the cover inplace. You'll hear a click when the back cover is locked in place.10 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
SIM cardThe SIM card contains your phone number, service details, and memory for storingphonebook contacts and/or text messages.Inserting the SIM card1. Take the back cover off.2. Remove the battery.3. With the SIM card’s gold contacts facing down and its cut-off corner facing out,insert the SIM card all the way into the SIM card slot. Removing the SIM cardMake sure to switch off HTC Explorer before removing your SIM card.1. Take the back cover off.2. Remove the battery.3. Press and hold the SIM card tab. 4. Slide the SIM card out from the SIM card slot.11 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Storage cardUse the storage card to store your photos, videos, and music.Inserting the storage card1. Take the back cover off.2. Insert the microSD card into the storage card slot with its gold contacts facingdown and slide it in until it is securely in place. Removing the storage cardIf HTC Explorer is on you must first "unmount" the storage card before removing itto prevent corrupting or damaging the files in the storage card.1. Take the back cover off.2. Slide the storage card out from its slot.Unmounting the storage cardWhen you need to remove the storage card while HTC Explorer is on, unmount thestorage card first to prevent corrupting or damaging the files in the storage card.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Storage > Unmount SD card.12 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
BatteryHTC Explorer uses a rechargeable battery. How long the battery can last before itneeds recharging depends on how you use HTC Explorer.The features and accessoriesyou use can affect battery life. For example, leaving your Bluetooth® connectionalways on uses more power. Long phone calls and frequent web browsing use up a lotof battery power. Also, consider your location: poor signal strength from your mobilenetwork and extreme temperature make the battery work harder.Removing the battery1. Take the back cover off.2. With your thumb or finger, lift the battery from the battery compartment. Inserting the batteryPlease use only original batteries that came in the box or replacements that werecommend.1. Take the back cover off.2. Insert the battery (with its exposed copper contacts first) into the batterycompartment. 13 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Charging the batteryBefore you turn on and start using HTC Explorer, it is recommended that you chargethe battery.§Only the power adapter and USB cable provided in the box must be used tocharge the battery.§Do not remove the battery from HTC Explorer while you are charging it using thepower or car adapter.1. Insert the small end of the USB cable into the USB connector. 2. Insert the other end of the USB cable into the power adapter.3. Plug in the power adapter to an electrical outlet to start charging the battery.When you charge the battery and HTC Explorer is on, the charging battery icon isdisplayed in the status bar. After the battery has been fully charged, the chargingbattery icon turns to a full battery icon .As a safety precaution, the battery stops charging when it overheats.Switching the power on or offSwitching the power onPress the POWER button. Easy. When you turn on HTC Explorer for the first time, you’ll need to set it up.14 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Switching the power off1. If the display is off, press the POWER button to turn it back on, then unlock thescreen.2. Press and hold the POWER button for a few seconds.3. When the Power options menu appears, tap Power off.Entering your PINMost SIM cards come with a PIN (personal identification number) set by your mobileoperator. If you’re asked for a PIN, enter it and then tap OK.If you enter the wrong PIN three times, your SIM card is blocked. No problem. Justcontact your mobile operator and ask for the PUK (PIN Unblocking Key).Finger gesturesTap When you want to type using the keyboard, select items onscreen suchas application and settings icons, or press onscreen buttons, simply tapthem with your finger.Press andholdTo open the available options for an item (for example, a contact or linkin a web page), simply press and hold the item.Swipe orslideTo swipe or slide means to quickly drag your finger vertically orhorizontally across the screen.Drag Press and hold your finger with some pressure before you start to drag.While dragging, do not release your finger until you have reached thetarget position.Flick Flicking the screen is similar to swiping, except that you need to swipeyour finger in light, quicker strokes. This finger gesture is always in avertical direction, such as when flicking the contacts or message list.Rotate For most screens, you can automatically change the screen orientationfrom portrait to landscape by turning HTC Explorer sideways. Whenentering text, you can turn HTC Explorer sideways to bring up a biggerkeyboard.Pinch In some apps, like Gallery or the web browser, you can “pinch” the screenusing two fingers (for example, thumb and index finger) to zoom in orzoom out when viewing a picture or a web page.15 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting up HTC Explorer for the first timeWhen you switch on HTC Explorer for the first time, you’ll be asked to set it up. Youcan choose how you want to connect to the Internet and whether you want yourcurrent location to be automatically detected. If you still have personal contacts andcalendar events stored on your old phone, you can easily transfer them toHTC Explorer through Bluetooth as well.Be sure to sign in to your Google® Account so you can use Google apps like Gmail™and Android Market™. You can also set up your other email accounts and Facebook®.Just follow the onscreen instructions and you’ll be up and running in no time.Some features that need to connect to the Internet such as location-based servicesand auto-sync of your online accounts may incur extra data fees. Don’t worry. Youcan enable or disable them in settings later on.Ways of getting contacts into HTC ExplorerThere are several ways you can add contacts to HTC Explorer. You can syncHTC Explorer with contacts from your Google Account, computer, Facebook, andmore.HTC Sync™Sync the contacts from your old phone to your computer, andthen use HTC Sync to sync HTC Explorer with your computer'sMicrosoft® Outlook®, Outlook Express or Windows® Contacts.Gmail Google contacts are imported to HTC Explorer after you sign in toyour Google Account. You can also create more Google contactsright from HTC Explorer.Facebook Log in to your Facebook account to import your Facebookfriends' contact information.Phone contacts You can choose to create and store contacts directly inHTC Explorer or transfer existing ones from your old phone.SIM card Copy all your SIM contacts to HTC Explorer.MicrosoftExchangeActiveSync®HTC Explorer syncs your work contacts from the MicrosoftExchange ActiveSync Server in your workplace.Transfer Use the Transfer app to transfer not only your contacts, but alsocalendar events and text messages from your old phone toHTC Explorer.16 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Home screenYour Home screen is where you make HTC Explorer your own. It comes with aShortcuts & Clock widget that contains shortcuts to your favorite apps and shows thetime and weather in your city. You can also add your favorite applications, shortcuts,folders and widgets so they’re always just a tap away. To find out how, see Personalizing on page 28.Extended Home screenAs you start to do more things with HTC Explorer, you might find that one Homescreen is not enough. No problem. You can use up to six extra screens. It should beplenty.Slide your finger horizontally to the left or right and you’ll discover more space foradding icons, widgets, and more. Press to return to the main Home screen (that is, the center home screen).17 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using Leap viewTo jump straight to the screen that you want, press or pinch the screen to showthe Leap view. It reveals all seven Home screens as thumbnails.Just tap the one you want and you’ll leap right there.18 Getting startedHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
BasicsAdjusting the volumeAdjusting the ringer volume changes the volume level of the ringtone, while adjustingthe media volume changes the volume level of sound notifications and music or videoplayback.Adjusting the ringer volume§Press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN button to adjust the ringer volume toyour desired level. The Ringer volume window appears on the screen to displaythe volume levels.§While in the lowest ringer volume level (Silent mode), press VOLUME DOWNonce to switch to Vibrate mode. The vibrate mode icon appears in the statusbar.§While in Vibrate mode, press VOLUME UP once to switch to silent mode. Thespeaker mute icon displays in the status bar.Adjusting the media volumeWhen playing music or watching video, press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWNbutton to adjust the volume. The Media volume window appears on the screen todisplay the volume level.Adjusting the earpiece volume for callsDuring a call, press the VOLUME UP or VOLUME DOWN button.Adjusting the volume via settings1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Sound > Volume.2. Drag the volume sliders to the left or right to adjust the volume levels of theringtone, media playback, alarms, and notifications. A sample tone is brieflyplayed with the volume being adjusted as you drag a slider.3. If you want the same volume for your ringtone and notifications, select Useincoming call volume for notifications.4. When you’re done, tap OK.19 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Sleep modeSleep mode saves battery power by putting HTC Explorer into a low power statewhile the display is off. It also stops accidental button presses when HTC Explorer is inyour bag. You’ll still receive messages and calls though.Switching to Sleep modeBriefly press the POWER button to turn off the display and switch to Sleep mode.HTC Explorer also automatically goes into Sleep mode when it’s idle for a while.Waking up from Sleep modeTo wake HTC Explorer up manually, press the POWER button. You’ll need to unlockthe screen.HTC Explorer automatically wakes up when you have an incoming call.Unlocking the screenPull the ring up to unlock the screen. If you have set up a screen unlock pattern, pin, or password, you will be asked todraw the pattern on the screen or enter the PIN or password before it unlocks.If you've set an event reminder or an alarm, you can drag or to the ring tosnooze or dismiss the event or alarm.20 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Opening an app from the lock screenOn the lock screen, drag an app icon to the ring to unlock the screen and directly goto the app. You can customize the lock screen in Settings > Personalize > Lock screenshortcuts to show your four favorite apps.Status and notificationsStatus iconsHere’s what each icon means:Signal strength Battery is fullGPRS connected Battery is chargingGPRS in use Battery is low (20% remaining)EDGE connected Battery is very low (10% or lessremaining)EDGE in use Silent mode3G connected Vibrate mode3G in use Microphone is muteHSDPA connected Speakerphone is onHSDPA in use Wired microphone headsetconnectedRoaming Wired headset connectedNo signal Bluetooth is on21 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
No SIM card installed Connected to a Bluetooth deviceConnected to a Wi-Fi® network Airplane modeData synchronizing GPS is onNetwork sharing is on Alarm is setNotification iconsNotification icons on the status bar make it easy for you to keep on top of yourmessages, calendar events, and alarms.Here’s what each one means:New Gmail message General notificationNew Microsoft ExchangeActiveSync or POP3/IMAP email Call in progressProblem with email delivery Missed callNew SMS/MMS Call on holdProblem with SMS/MMS delivery Call forwarding onNew Google Talk™ instantmessage Message forwarding onNew voicemail HTC Explorer is connected to acomputer via USB cableUpcoming event Wi-Fi is on and wireless networksare availableNew updates from your socialnetworksMatched contacts suggestion Uploading data (animated)22 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Bluetooth pairing request Downloading data (animated)HTC Explorer software updateavailable Waiting to uploadSong is playing Downloaded Android Market appinstalled successfullyFM Radio app in use Update available for an appdownloaded from Android MarketVoice recording is on Blank cardMore (not displayed) notifications Internal storage is lowNotifications panelWhen you get a new notification, you can open the Notifications panel to see whatevent notification or new information you've received. The Notifications panel lets youquickly switch between recently-opened apps, and also lets you easily turn on settingssuch as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth.To open the Notifications panel, press and hold the status bar, then slide your fingerdownward.If you have several notifications, you can scroll downthe screen to see them all.You can also open the Notifications panel on the Home screen by pressing andthen tapping Notifications.23 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Switching between recently opened appsOn the Notifications panel, you can easily access up to eight apps you just recentlyopened.1. Press and hold the status bar, then slide your finger downward to open theNotifications panel.2. In the Recent apps section, slide your finger left or right to see recently-openedapps. 3. Tap an app to open it.Press and hold to view recently used apps.Using Quick SettingsThe Quick Settings tab lets you easily turn on Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, and more, and alsoprovides a quick shortcut to all HTC Explorer settings.1. Press and hold the status bar, then slide your finger downward to open theNotifications panel.2. Tap the Quick Settings tab.3. Tap the check box next to an item to turn it off or on. Closing the Notifications panelPress and hold the bottom bar of the Notifications panel, then slide your finger up thescreen. Or just press .24 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Connecting HTC Explorer to a computerWhenever you connect HTC Explorer to a computer using the USB cable, the Choosea connection type screen opens and lets you choose the type of USB connection.Select one of the following choices, and then tap Done:Charge only Select this option if you only want to charge the battery whileconnected to your computer.Disk drive This mode is available only when there’s a storage card installed onHTC Explorer. Select this mode when you want to copy files betweenthe storage card and your computer.When Disk drive mode is enabled while HTC Explorer is connected tothe computer, you will not be able to use apps on HTC Explorer toaccess the storage card.HTC Sync Select this option to synchronize contacts, calendar, and otherinformation between your computer and HTC Explorer.USBtetheringWhen you do not have an Internet connection on your computer, youcan select this mode to share the mobile data connection ofHTC Explorer with your computer.Internet pass-throughIf you don’t have a data plan or you don’t have access to a Wi-Finetwork, you can select this mode to share your computer’s Internetconnection with HTC Explorer.Copying files to or from the storage cardYou can copy your music, photos, and other files to the storage card.1. Connect HTC Explorer to your computer using the supplied USB cable.2. On the Choose a connection type screen, select Disk drive, and then tap Done.On your computer, the storage card is recognized as a removable disk.3. Navigate to the removable disk and open it.4. Do one of the following:§Copy the files from the computer to the storage card’s root folder.§Copy the files from the storage card to a folder in your computer.5. After copying the files, unmount the removable disk (that is, the connectedHTC Explorer) as required by your computer’s operating system to safelyremove HTC Explorer.6. Do one of the following:§Disconnect HTC Explorer from the computer.§If you want to keep HTC Explorer connected to the computer but want it tobe able to access the storage card, open the Notifications panel, tap Diskdrive, select an option except Disk drive, and then tap Done.25 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Copying text, looking up information, andsharingIn apps such as the web browser and Mail, you can select text and choose what youwant to do with it.Selecting text1. Press and hold on a word.2. Drag the start and end markers to highlight the surrounding text you want toselect. To copy the address of a linked web page, press and hold the link, and then tapCopy link URL.Copying and pasting text1. After you have selected the text you want to copy, tap Copy. The selected text is then copied to the clipboard.2. In a text entry field (for example while composing an email), press and hold atthe point where you want to paste the text.3. Tap Paste.Searching or translating text1. After you have selected the text you want to search for or translate, tap .2. Tap one of the following tabs:Google SearchLook for related information using Google Search, based on the text thatyou selected.WikipediaLook for related information on Wikipedia®, based on the text that youselected.26 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
YouTubeLook for videos on YouTube®, based on the text that you selected.Google TranslateTranslate the text to another language.Sharing text1. After you have selected the text you want to share, tap .2. Choose where to paste and share the selected text, such as in an email messageor Facebook status update.27 BasicsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
PersonalizingMaking HTC Explorer truly yoursMake HTC Explorer look and sound just the way you want it. Personalize it with adifferent wallpaper, skin, ringtone, and notification sound for events such as incomingtext, email, and calendar reminders.On the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize to get started.Personalizing HTC Explorer with scenesHTC Explorer becomes multiple phones in one when you use scenes. Scenes arepersonalized Home screen layouts that you can quickly apply. By switching betweenscenes, you instantly turn HTC Explorer into your perfect weekend phone, travelphone, work phone, or pure play phone.Everytime you add or modify something on the Home screen, HTC Explorerautomatically saves your changes to the current scene selected.Using a preset sceneHTC Explorer features preset scenes, each preconfigured with a different wallpaperand collection of widgets that reflect different moments in your life. You can choose ascene that is suitable for work, play, travel, or your social life.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the scene you want.4. Tap Apply.To download more scenes, press , and then tap Personalize . On the Display tab,tap Scene > Get more.Creating a new sceneYou’ll start with an empty Home screen when you create a new scene.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.3. Press , and then tap New.28 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Enter a new scene name, then tap Done.5. Personalize the scene by adding widgets and other elements, arranging theHome screen layout, and changing the skin or wallpaper. All of your changes willbe automatically saved to this scene.Renaming a scene1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Scene.3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the scene you want torename.4. Press and hold a scene thumbnail, then tap Rename.5. Enter a new scene name, then tap Done.Deleting scenes1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Scene3. Press , and then tap Delete.4. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to browse through scenes, thentap one or more scenes you want to delete.5. Tap Delete.Changing your wallpaperPersonalizing your wallpaper with your favorite photo is a quick and easy way to giveHTC Explorer a fresh look. Browse the collection of wallpapers included inHTC Explorer or choose from photos that you have taken with the camera. You canalso change your Home screen to use an animated wallpaper.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Wallpaper.3. Tap one of the following:HTC wallpapers Choose a preset wallpaper, then tap Preview > Apply.Live wallpapers Choose from preset animated wallpapers. Tap Preview toview the animation, and then tap Apply.Gallery Choose an existing photo. Crop the photo and then tap Save.To download more wallpapers, press , and then tap Personalize . On the Displaytab, tap Wallpaper > HTC wallpapers > Get more.29 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Applying a new skinPersonalize beyond the Home screen by applying a new skin. Skins are set to give adifferent look and feel to most onscreen buttons, application screens, option menus,and other items.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Skin.3. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to select the skin you want.4. Tap Apply.To download more skins, press , and then tap Personalize . On the Display tab,tap Skin > Get more.Personalizing your Home screen with widgetsWidgets put at-a-glance important information and media content up front on yourHome screen. Some widgets are already added to your Home screen for yourconvenience. You can add more from the available selections of widgets.Adding a widget to your Home screen1. Go to a part of the Home screen where there’s space to add a new widget.2. Press , and then tap Personalize.3. On the Add to home tab, tap Widget.4. Select a widget that you want.5. Most HTC widgets are available in a variety of designs and sizes to suit yourneeds. Slide your finger on the screen from right to left to view the differentstyles, and then tap Select to choose one.You can also add widgets that allow you to quickly switch on or off certain settingssuch as Wi-Fi and Bluetooth. Scroll down the widgets list, tap Settings, and then tapthe widget that you want.To download more widgets, press , and then tap Personalize. On the Add toHome tab, tap Widget > Get more HTC widgets.30 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Changing the settings of a widgetYou can modify basic settings of some widgets (for example, the People and Mailwidgets) from the Home screen.1. Press and hold a widget on the Home screen. HTC Explorer vibrates and you’llsee a colored box around the widget. Don’t lift your finger just yet.2. Drag the widget to . The relevant screen where you can change some settings for this widget thenopens.3. Customize the widget settings.Adding icons and other shortcuts on yourHome screenPlace app icons on your Home screen to open apps quicker. You can also addshortcuts to settings and specific information such as a bookmarked webpage,someone’s phone number, a music playlist, route directions, and many other items, toyour Home screen.The shortcuts available depend on the apps that are installed on HTC Explorer.1. Go to a Home screen where there’s space to add a new icon or shortcut.2. Press , and then tap Personalize.3. On the Add to Home tab, tap App to add an app icon, or Shortcut to add ashortcut to a setting or information.To add an app icon on the Home screen, tap , and then press and hold an appicon. Without lifting your finger, drag the icon to an empty area on the Homescreen, and then release it.31 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Adding folders on your Home screenUse folders to group related apps and other shortcuts to keep your Home screen tidyand organized. You can also add information folders that show up-to-date informationsuch as Bluetooth received files, your Facebook phonebook, and more.Creating a new folder and adding items to it1. Go to a part of the Home screen where there’s space to add a new folder.2. Press , and then tap Personalize.3. On the Add to home tab, tap Folder.4. Tap New Folder. The new folder appears on the Home screen.5. Go to the Home screen where there is an app, icon, or shortcut, and then pressand hold it. HTC Explorer then vibrates. Don’t lift your finger just yet.6. Drag the app, icon, or shortcut and drop it on the folder.Simply tap the folder to open it so you can access theapps and shortcuts inside the folder.Renaming a folder1. Tap the folder to open it.2. Press and hold the folder window’s title bar.3. Enter a new folder name and then tap OK.Rearranging or removing widgets and icons onyour Home screenRearrange the widgets and icons on your Home screen to make room for adding moreitems. You can also remove widgets and icons that you don’t frequently use.Moving a widget or icon1. Press and hold the widget or icon you want to move. HTC Explorer vibrates andyou’ll see a colored box around the widget or icon. Don’t lift your finger just yet.2. Drag the widget or icon to a new location on the screen. §You can pause at the left or right edge of the screen to drag the widget or icononto another Home screen panel.§When you drag an icon to a spot that’s occupied by another icon, the occupantautomatically moves away to give room.3. When the widget or icon is where you want it, lift your finger.32 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Removing a widget or icon1. Press and hold the widget or icon you want to remove. HTC Explorer vibratesand you'll see a colored box around the widget or icon. Don’t lift your finger justyet.2. Drag the widget or icon to .3. When the widget or icon also turns red, lift your finger.Rearranging the Home screenReorder your Home screen panels in any way that fits how you use them. Forexample, move the panels with frequently-used widgets, shortcuts, and folders closerto the main Home screen.The main Home screen is the panel that is bordered by a thin line in Leap view.1. Pinch the Home screen to show the Leap view.2. Press and hold the thumbnail of the home screen you want to move.HTC Explorer then vibrates. Don’t lift your finger just yet.3. Drag the thumbnail to its new position, and then lift your finger. Customizing the shortcuts on the lock screenYou can choose what shortcuts you want for your lock screen so you can unlock thescreen straight into your favorite app.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Display tab, tap Lock screen > Choose lock screen shortcuts.33 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap a shortcut that you want to change, and then choose another app toreplace it .4. Tap Done.Using sound setsEach sound set gives you a different combination of sounds for your ringtone andnotifications such as incoming messages, email, calendar event reminders, and more.By switching between sound sets, you can instantly make HTC Explorer ring or alertyou with fun sounds when you're out with friends or change to subtle sounds whileyou're at work.Choosing a preset sound set1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound sets screen, and then tap a sound set name.3. You can tap to listen to the different sounds for that sound set.4. Tap Apply.To download more sound sets, press , and then tap Personalize . On the Soundtab, tap Sound set > Get more.Creating a sound set1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.3. Tap 4. Enter a new sound set name, and then tap Done.The newly created sound set is then added to the list of sound sets. You can assigndifferent tones to the sound set to your preference.Changing your ringtone, notifications, and soundsChange your ringtone, notification sounds, and alarms to suit your mood or lifestyle.Choose different sounds from the preset selection or your storage card.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.34 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Choose a sound set you want to customize or create a new one, and then tapApply.4. Change the ringtone, notification sound, and alarm from the Personalize screen. You can also go to the Messages, Mail, and Calendar apps to choose sounds fornew messages, email, and calendar reminders respectively.HTC Explorer automatically saves your choices to the current sound set.Deleting sound sets1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Personalize.2. On the Sound tab, tap Sound set.3. Press , and then tap Delete.4. Tap one or more sound sets you want to delete.5. Tap Delete.Rearranging or hiding application tabsYou can rearrange the tabs of some apps to prioritize the types of information youfrequently use or remove the tabs you don’t really need.1. Open an app that has the usual tabs at the bottom of its screen. 2. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you the area whereyou can rearrange icons, lift your finger.3. Do any of the following:Add a tab Press and hold a tab that you want to add, and then drag itbeside the other tabs.Move a tab Press and hold the tab you want to move, and then drag it to itsnew position.Remove a tab Press and hold a tab you want to hide, then drag it up.4. When you’re done, press .Adding a tab back1. Open the app from which you previously removed some tabs.2. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you some of yourhidden tabs, lift your finger.35 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Press and hold the tab you want to show, then drag it down to where you wantto position it again. 4. When you’re done, press .Shortcuts & Clock widgetOpen often-used apps or preview their contents right from the Home screen.From the Shortcuts & Clock widget, you can:§Tap the shortcut to an app to open it§Tap the information bar to extend it and view the contents of that app§Tap the preview of the content and open it36 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Customizing the Shortcuts & Clock widgetYou can choose which shortcuts and city appear on the Shortcuts & Clock widget.1. On the Home screen, tap and hold the Shortcuts & Clock widget. Don't lift yourfinger just yet.2. Drag the widget to .3. From this screen, you can:§Tap a shortcut slot, and then choose an app or shortcut to assign to it.§Tap the time, and then select a city that will appear in the widget. If yourcity is not included in the list, tap to add your city.4. Tap Done.The Shortcuts & Clock widget is updated.37 PersonalizingHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Phone callsDifferent ways of making callsBesides making calls from the phone dialer screen on HTC Explorer, you can tap anumber in a text message or email to call, or press a single number on the phonedialer to quickly call a contact.Most SIM cards come with a PIN (personal identification number) set by yourmobile operator. If you’re asked for a PIN, enter it and then tap OK. If you enter thewrong PIN three times, your SIM card is blocked. Don't worry. Just contact yourmobile operator and ask for the PUK (PIN Unblocking Key).Making a call on the Phone dialer screenYou can either dial a number directly, or use the Smart dial feature to search and call astored contact or a number from your call history.1. On the Home screen, tap .2. Begin entering the first few digits of a phone number or characters of a contactname on the phone keypad. The Phone dialer screen then displays a list ofmatching numbers and names.If you enter a wrong digit or letter, tap to delete it. To erase the entire entry,press and hold .3. Slide your finger up on the filtered list to close the phone keypad and see ifthere are more matching numbers or contacts. 4. To place a call, do one of the following:§Tap a phone number or contact from the list.§After entering a complete number, tap Call.§To call a different phone number associated with the contact, you can tap at the right side of the contact name. On the contact details screen, tapthe number you want to call.While dialing or when the call is in progress, the status bar displays the call in progressicon .38 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
What is Smart dial?The phone dialer’s Smart dial feature makes it quick and easy for you to place a call.Simply enter the phone number or first few letters of the person’s name you want tocall. Smart dial automatically searches and filters your stored contacts and the phonenumbers from the call history.Using Speed dialUse Speed dial to call a phone number with a single tap. For example, if you assign acontact’s number to the number 2 key, you can just press and hold 2 to dial thenumber.The number 1 key is generally reserved for your voicemail. Press and hold this keyto call voicemail and retrieve your voicemail messages.Assigning a speed dial key1. On the Home screen, tap Phone.2. Press , and then tap Speed dial > .3. Enter the name of the contact you want to add. When the name comes up inthe list, tap the name.4. On the Speed dial screen, choose the phone number of the contact to use, and aspeed dial key to assign.5. Tap Save.You can also set a speed dial key in People. Tap a contact, press , and thenselect Set speed dial (or More > Set speed dial).39 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Calling a phone number in a text message1. Tap the phone number within the message. 2. Tap Call. To call the message sender, tap the received message, and then tap Call on theoptions menu.Calling a phone number in an emailWant to call a number that's in an email? No problem.1. In the email body, tap the phone number.2. Edit the number if necessary.3. Tap Call.Calling a phone number in a Calendar eventTapping a phone number in a Calendar event lets you see the event details such asconference call ID number or meeting PIN code while on the Phone dialer screen.1. Open an event in Calendar.2. On the Event details screen, tap the phone number.3. Tap Call.Making an emergency callIn some regions, you can make emergency calls from HTC Explorer even if you don’thave a SIM card installed or your SIM card has been blocked.1. On the Home screen, tap .2. Dial the emergency number for your locale, and then tap Call.If you’ve enabled but forgotten your lock password or lock pattern, you can still makeemergency calls by tapping Emergency call on the screen.40 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Receiving callsWhen you receive a phone call from a contact, the Incoming call screen appears.You can use the polite ringer and pocket mode features for receiving calls. To findout how, see Changing sound settings on page 166.Answering a callDo one of the following:§Tap Answer.§If the display is off when you get a call, the Lock screen appears. Drag to thering to unlock the screen and answer the call.Rejecting a callDo one of the following:§Tap Decline.§If the display is off when you get a call, the Lock screen appears. Drag to thering on the Lock screen.§Press the POWER button twice to reject a call.Muting the ringing sound without rejecting the callDo one of the following:§Press the VOLUME DOWN or VOLUME UP button.§Press the POWER button.§Place HTC Explorer face down on a level surface.If HTC Explorer is already facing down, it will still ring when there are subsequentincoming calls.41 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
HTC Caller IDEverytime you make a call or your friend gives you a ring, you get to see your friend’slatest status update from social networks like Facebook or Twitter™ right on the callscreen. You also won’t miss people’s birthdays. You’ll see a birthday reminder, if yourfriend’s birthday will occur sometime within the next seven days.What can I do during a call?When a call is in progress, use the buttons onscreen to mute or unmute themicrophone or to turn the speakerphone on or off. You can also press and choosewhether to add a call, place the call on hold, mute the microphone, and more.Putting a call on hold1. Press and then tap Hold to put the call on hold. When you put a call on hold,the status bar displays the hold call icon .2. Press , and then tap Unhold to resume the call.Switching between callsIf you’re already on a call and accept another call, you can choose to switch betweenthe two calls.1. When you receive another call, tap Answer to accept the second call and putthe first call on hold.2. To switch between the calls, tap the person you want to talk to on the screen. 3. To end the current call and return to the other call, tap End call.42 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Turning the speakerphone on during a callTo decrease potential damage to your hearing, do not hold HTC Explorer againstyour ear when the speakerphone is on.Do one of the following:§Flip HTC Explorer over during a call (be sure that Flip for speaker is selected in > > Settings > Sound).§On the call screen, tap .The speakerphone icon appears in the status bar when the speakerphone is on.To turn the speakerphone off, just flip HTC Explorer over again, facing it up. Or tap again.Muting the microphone during a callOn the call screen, tap to toggle between turning the microphone on or off.When the microphone is turned off, the mute icon appears in the status bar.Ending a callDo one of the following to end the call:§On the call screen, tap End call.If the display is off, press POWER to turn on the screen so you can tap End call.§Slide open the Notifications panel, then tap .If the phone number of the person who called is not in your contacts list, you canchoose to save the number to your contacts list after you hang up.Setting up a conference callConference calling with your friends, family, or co-workers is easy. Make the first call(or accept a call), and then simply dial each subsequent call to add it to theconference.Make sure your SIM card is enabled with conference calling service. Contact yourmobile operator for details.1. Make a call to the first conference call participant.2. When connected, press , tap Add call, and then dial the number of thesecond participant. The first participant is put on hold when you dial the secondparticipant.3. When connected to the second participant, tap merge .43 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. To add another participant to the conference call, tap on the conference callscreen, and then dial the number of the contact you want to invite to theconference call.5. When connected, tap to add the participant to the conference call.6. To talk to a person in the conference call in private, tap and then selectPrivate call on the options menu.To end the call with a participant, tap and then tap Finish this call on the optionsmenu.To end the conference call, tap End call.Internet callsWhen you're connected to a Wi-Fi network, you can make and receive calls throughan Internet calling account.Before you add an Internet calling account, make sure that you've registered withan Internet calling service that supports voice calls over Session Initiation Protocol(SIP). Internet calls to phone numbers may incur additional fees.Adding an Internet calling account1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Call.2. Under Internet call settings, tap Accounts.3. Tap Add account.4. Enter your account details.5. Press to save your account.6. To set HTC Explorer to receive Internet calls on your added account, tap theReceive incoming calls check box.Making an Internet callMake an Internet call to either your contact's Internet calling account or phonenumber.Call any of the following:Internetcallingaccount§In People, tap a contact who has an Internet calling account, and thentap Internet call.§In Call History, tap an Internet call log.PhonenumberSee Different ways of making calls on page 38. But first, setHTC Explorer to use Internet calling for your outgoing calls. From theHome screen, press , and then tap Settings > Call. Tap Use Internetcalling, and then select either For all calls or Ask for each call.44 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using Call historyUse Call History to check missed calls, your dialed numbers, and received calls.Checking a missed callYou will see the missed call icon in the status bar when you miss a call.1. Slide open the Notifications panel to check who the caller is.2. To return the call, tap the missed call notification. Then tap the caller’s name ornumber on the Call History screen.Checking calls in the Call History1. On the Home screen, tap .2. Slide to the Call History tab.3. On the Call History screen, you can:§Tap a name or number in the list to call.§Press and hold a name or number in the list to display the options menu.§Tap to check only the call history of a particular contact.§Press , then tap View to display just a particular type of calls such asmissed calls or outgoing calls.Adding a new phone number to your contacts from Call History1. On the Call History screen, press and hold the phone number that you want tosave, and then tap Save to People.2. Choose whether to create a new contact or save the number to an existingcontact on HTC Explorer.3. Do any of the following:§When creating a new contact, enter the contact name, contact type, andother information in the blank contact record that appears. The phonenumber is automatically added to the mobile field in the phone section. Tostore it as another type of number, for example a home number, tap theMobile button.§When saving the number to an existing contact, tap a contact stored onHTC Explorer, and then select the number type.4. Tap Save.45 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Clearing the Call History listOn the Call History screen, do one of the following:Remove one name ornumberPress and hold the name or number, and then tap Deletefrom call history.Clear the entire list Press , and then tap Remove call history. Tap Select all> Delete.Using Home dialingWhen you're on a trip abroad, it's easy to dial friends and family from home. Yourhome country code is automatically added when you make calls to your contacts onHTC Explorer while roaming.HTC Explorer dials normally when entering phone numbers that are not saved inPeople. If you want to call an unsaved phone number in your country, you still needto enter a plus (+) sign and country code before the phone number.1. On the Home screen, tap .2. Begin entering the first few digits of a phone number or characters of a contactname on the phone keypad.3. Tap a phone number or contact from the contact list. HTC Explorer then dialsthe number with your home country code.Changing the default country code for Home dialing1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Call > Phone settings > Home dialing settings.3. Choose the country that you want from the country code dropdown list.4. Tap OK.Turning off Home dialingIf you prefer to manually enter complete phone numbers to call while roaming, youcan turn off Home dialing.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Call > Phone settings.2. Clear the Home dialing check box.46 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Call servicesHTC Explorer can directly link to the mobile phone network, and enable you to accessand change the settings of various phone services. Call services may include callforwarding, call waiting, voicemail, and more. Contact your mobile operator to find outabout the availability of call services.To open call services, press from the Home screen, and then tap Settings > Call.Fixed DialingNumbersRestrict outgoing calls to a fixed set of numbers. To enable thisfeature, you must know your SIM card’s PIN2 code.Voicemail service Shows the current voicemail service being used.Voicemail settings Specify another voicemail number aside from the one specifiedby your service provider.Clear voicemailnotificationIf you have a notification of a new voicemail, you can clear thenotification with this option.Phone settings Modify your phone settings such as automatic saving of anunknown contact number when a call with that number ends.Call forwarding Select how you want to handle busy, unanswered, andunreachable calls. You can also set the call forwarding optionfor all incoming calls.Call barringsettingsChoose whether to block various categories of incoming andoutgoing calls.Additional settings Enable or disable operator services such as caller ID and callwaiting.Cell broadcast Enable or disable receipt of cell broadcast messages.Cell broadcastsettingsConfigure channels and language for cell broadcast messages.Accounts Add, modify, or remove Internet calling accounts. You can alsochoose whether to receive incoming Internet calls.Use Internet calling Select whether to use Internet calling for all calls you make orfor Internet address calls only, or to be asked which you preferfor each call you make.47 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Turning Airplane mode on or offIn many countries, you are required by law to turn off wireless devices while on boardan aircraft. A way to turn off wireless functions quickly is to switch HTC Explorer toAirplane mode.When you enable Airplane mode, all wireless radios on HTC Explorer are turned off,including the call function, data services, Bluetooth, and Wi-Fi. When you disableAirplane mode, the call function is turned back on and the previous state of Bluetoothand Wi-Fi is restored.To turn Airplane mode on or off, press and hold POWER, and then tap Airplane mode.When enabled, the Airplane mode icon is displayed in the status bar.48 Phone callsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Search and Web browserSearching HTC Explorer and the WebYou can search for information on HTC Explorer and on the Web by using GoogleSearch. Some applications, such as People or Mail, have their own search function,which you can use to search only within those applications.Setting search options1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Search > Google search.3. Choose the settings that you want.Show websuggestionsDisplay suggestions for Google web searches below thesearch box as you type.Use My Location Include your location in searches to get local searchresults.Search history Use suggestions from the web-based Google searchhistory, from your Google Account. Tap Manage searchhistory to view or manage the web search historyassociated with your Google Account on the web browser.4. Press .5. Tap Searchable items, and then select the items you want included when doinga search.Performing searches on the web and HTC Explorer1. From the Home screen, press .2. Enter the search item in the search box. As you type, matching items onHTC Explorer and suggestions from Google web search are shown as a list.3. Do one of the following§To narrow your search, tap , select another search location (for example,Apps), and then tap .§If what you’re searching for is in the list of suggestions, tap it in the list. Theitem opens in the appropriate application.§To edit an item in the list, tap . The item will appear in the search box,where you can edit it.§If what you’re searching for is not in the list, tap to search the web. Theweb browser opens, displaying the results of a Google search.49 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Quickly looking up information on the WebQuick Lookup helps you learn about something right on the spot. When you enter anew word or phrase, you can easily look it up in popular websites or search servicessuch as Google Search and Wikipedia.1. From the Home screen, tap > Quick Lookup.2. If the onscreen keyboard is open, press to close it first so you’ll see thebottom tabs.3. Slide across the tabs to pick where you want to look up information. Then in thesearch box, enter what you want to search for.4. Tap .After looking up the item on one tab, you can slide to other tabs to automaticallylook up the same term there.Translating words to other languages1. From the Home screen, tap > Quick Lookup.2. If the onscreen keyboard is open, press to close it first so you’ll see thebottom tabs.3. Slide to the Google Translate tab.4. Under From language, choose the original language, then enter the word orphrase you want to translate.5. Under To language, choose from the languages available for translation.6. Tap Translate.Using the web browserDo one of the following to open the web browser and start surfing the Web:§On the Home screen, tap Internet.§From the Home screen, tap > Internet.Going to a webpage1. On the browser screen, tap the URL box on top of the screen.2. Enter the webpage address using the keyboard. As you enter the address,matching webpage addresses will appear on the screen.3. Do one of the following:§Tap an address to go directly to that webpage.§Continue typing in the webpage address, then tap .50 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Changing the screen orientationTurn HTC Explorer sideways to display the web browser in landscape orientation.If the screen orientation doesn’t change automatically, turn on automatic screenorientation. From the Home screen, press , tap Settings > Display, and thenselect the Auto-rotate screen check box.Navigating and zooming on a webpage§You can swipe your finger on the screen to navigate and view other areas of thewebpage.§Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in, then tap the screen twice quickly againto zoom out. You can also use your fingers to spread or pinch the screen tozoom in and out.Selecting a link on a webpageYou can tap a link to open it, or press and hold a link for more options.Link What to doWebpageaddress(URLs)§Tap the link to open the webpage.§Press and hold the link to open a menu that allows you to open,bookmark, copy to the clipboard, or share the link.Email address §Tap to send an email message to the email address.§Press and hold, then tap Copy on the menu to copy the emailaddress to the clipboard. You can paste the email address laterwhen creating a new contact or sending a new email message.Selecting an address or phone number on a webpageOn a webpage, you can:§Tap an address to view the location on a map.§Tap a phone number to call.Opening a new browser windowOpen multiple browser windows to make it easier for you to switch from one websiteto another.1. While viewing a webpage, press and then tap Windows.2. Tap .A new browser window opens.51 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Switching between browser windows1. While viewing a webpage, do one of the following:§Press and then tap Windows.§Pinch the screen (zoom out) until you see the other browser windows.2. Slide your finger until the webpage you want to view appears. 3. Tap a webpage to display it in full screen. Tap to close a webpage.Downloading from the WebDo more than just browsing the Web. You can download files such as photos andmusic as well as apps using the web browser.Before downloading an app, check first its compatibility with HTC Explorer to makesure it can be installed.Downloading apps from the WebYou can download apps directly from your favorite websites. Apps downloaded fromthe Web can be from unknown sources. To protect HTC Explorer and your personaldata, we strongly recommend that you download and install only apps you trust.1. Open your web browser, then go to the website where you can download theapp you want.2. Follow the website's instructions for downloading the app.Before you can install the downloaded app, you need to set HTC Explorer to allowinstallation of third-party apps. From the Home screen, press , then tap Settings >Applications > Unknown sources.52 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Viewing your downloadsWhile viewing a webpage, press and then tap More > Downloads.Viewing bookmarks and previously visitedpagesYou can store as many bookmarks as you want on HTC Explorer. You can also accessa convenient list of the sites you have visited, or quickly view the pages that youaccess most often.Bookmarking a webpage1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Add > Add bookmark.2. To bookmark the web page under a certain category (such as sports or dining),tap Add tags and enter a tag name. This groups similar web pages so you caneasily locate them.3. Edit the bookmark name if needed, and then tap Done.Opening a bookmark1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. Do one of the following:§On the Bookmarks tab , navigate to the bookmark you want to open,and then tap it.§On the Tags tab , open a tag group, navigate to the bookmark you wantto open, and then tap it.Editing a bookmark1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the Bookmarks tab , press and then tap Edit.3. Tap at the right of the bookmark you want to edit.4. Enter your changes, and then tap Done.Viewing a previously visited page1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the History tab , navigate to the page you want to view and then tap thepage.Clearing the list of previously visited pages1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the History tab , press , and then tap Clear history.53 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Viewing a page that you often visit1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the Most visited tab , navigate to the page you want to view, and thentap the page.Clearing the list of most visited pages1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the Most visited tab , press , and then tap Clear all.Changing the view of bookmarks or most visited pages1. While viewing a webpage, press , and then tap Bookmarks.2. On the Bookmarks tab or the Most visited tab , press , and then tapThumbnails, List, or Grid to change the view. For example, if you are in Thumbnails view and you want to view bookmarks ina grid, press and tap List, then press and tap Grid.Setting browser optionsCustomize the web browser to suit your browsing style. Set display, privacy, andsecurity options when using the web browser.From the browser screen, press , and then tap More > Settings.Setting your home page1. From the browser screen, press , and then tap More > Settings > Set homepage.2. Select the home page you want to use.Browsing full versions of all websitesSome websites display a mobile version of their pages on phone web browsers. Youcan choose to view the full version of all pages, even for these sites.From the browser screen, press , tap More > Settings, and then clear the Mobileview check box.54 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Choosing when to show Adobe Flash contentChoose which Adobe® Flash® content you want to see on a webpage, and when youwant to view it.1. From the browser screen, press , and then tap More > Settings > Enableplugins.2. Tap On demand.After selecting On demand, you can show the Adobe Flash content by tapping onthe webpage.55 Search and Web browserHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Accounts and syncAbout online accountsHTC Explorer can sync with your Facebook and email accounts.The information you can get includes:§Gmail, Exchange ActiveSync, and other POP3/IMAP email.§Google and Exchange ActiveSync contacts, as well as your friends’ contactinformation in Facebook.§Calendar events from your Google Account(s), from Exchange ActiveSync, andfrom your Facebook account.§Status updates and links shared by your friends and yourself on Facebook.§Facebook photo uploads.You can set up your Exchange ActiveSync and POP3/IMAP email accounts onHTC Explorer either in the Mail app or the Accounts & sync settings.Synchronizing with a Google AccountSigning in to your Google Account lets you sync Gmail and your Google contacts andcalendars between HTC Explorer and the Web. You also need to sign in to a GoogleAccount to use Google apps such as Google Talk and Android Market.If you skipped adding a Google Account when you first set up HTC Explorer, youmay encounter problems when using some Google apps. If these problems persist,you may need to factory reset HTC Explorer and enter your Google Account detailswhen you set up HTC Explorer again.Adding more Google AccountsYou can add more than one Google Account. However, subsequent Google Accountscan only sync contacts, emails, and calendar events. Other Google services use thefirst Google Account you added.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Tap Add account > Google.3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign in to an account or create a newaccount.56 Accounts and syncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Forgot your Google Account password?If you have forgotten your Google Account password, you can try to recover itby going to the Google website.1. On HTC Explorer or on your computer, open your web browser and goto https://www.google.com/accounts/ForgotPasswd.2. Enter the email address or username that you use to sign in to yourGoogle Account and click Submit.3. Follow the instructions on the screen to reset your password.If you don’t have an alternate email address or cannot access the emailaccount you used to create your Google Account, you can reset your GoogleAccount after 24 hours by answering the security question for passwordrecovery.Adding a social network accountIf you skipped signing in to your social network account (such as Facebook) whenyou first turned on and set up HTC Explorer, you can still add the account in thesettings.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Tap Add account, and then tap the account type you want to add.3. Follow the onscreen instructions to enter the account information.Your social network account is then added to the list on the Accounts & sync screen.Depending on how you configured the account, the new information may startsynchronizing with HTC Explorer.Managing your online accountsChanging general sync settings1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Select or clear the following:BackgrounddataIf this is selected, apps can send and receive online accountinformation even if you are not currently using them.Auto-sync If this is selected, apps can use the sync schedule defined inthe account settings. If this is cleared, you will need to syncaccounts manually.57 Accounts and syncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Synchronizing an account manually1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Tap the account that you want to sync.3. Tap Sync now.Changing account settingsYou can change settings such as the sync frequency and the types of informationsynchronized, the kinds of notification you receive, and the way that accountinformation is displayed.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. On the Accounts & sync screen, tap the account that you want to edit.3. Tap the type of information you want to sync or select an item to edit itssettings.Removing an accountYou can remove an account to delete it and all information associated with it fromHTC Explorer, for example email, contacts, or settings. Removing an account does notdelete information from the online service itself.You cannot remove some accounts, such as the first Google account you signedinto, except by deleting all personal information from HTC Explorer with a hardreset.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Tap the account that you want to remove.3. Tap Remove account, and then confirm that you want to remove the account.58 Accounts and syncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
PeopleTransferring contacts from your old phoneEasily transfer contacts from your old phone to HTC Explorer through Bluetooth.Depending on your old phone’s model, you may also transfer other types of data suchas calendar events and text messages to HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, tap > Transfer.2. Tap Next to begin.3. Choose your old phone's name and model.4. On your old phone, turn Bluetooth on and set it to discoverable mode.5. On HTC Explorer, tap Next to continue. HTC Explorer automatically turnsBluetooth on and searches for Bluetooth devices.6. From the device list, choose your old phone and then tap Next. HTC Explorerthen tries to pair with your old phone. You’ll see a security passkey on thescreen.7. On your old phone, enter this passkey or simply confirm it.8. Select the Contacts check box (and other supported types of data you want toimport), and then tap Next.9. When HTC Explorer finishes importing data, tap Done.59 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
About the People appWith the People app, easily manage your communications with your contacts viaphone, messaging, and email. You can also link your contacts to their social networkaccount such as Facebook to see their updates and events from the account all in oneplace.And that's not all. If you have the same contacts from different sources, People letsyou merge their contact information so you won't have duplicate entries in yourcontacts list.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Tap one of the following tabs:PhoneLaunches the Phone dialer screen.PeopleGives you access to all contacts on HTC Explorer, online accounts, andmore.GroupsLets you assign contacts to groups so you can easily send an SMS, MMS,or email message to a whole group.Call HistoryLists all your dialed numbers and received and missed calls.60 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Your contacts listThe People app lists all contacts stored on HTC Explorer and from the online accountsyou're logged in to. When you open People after you've just logged in to a newaccount, you'll be asked whether to add contacts from that account to your contactslist.Your contacts list also displays the contacts stored on your SIM card (usually markedwith the SIM card icon ).You can:§Open your profile and edit your own contactinformation.§Create, edit, or find contacts.§See status updates from friends in your socialnetwork account such as Facebook.§Tap a contact's name to open the contact detailsscreen for that contact.§See a notification icon such as when a contacthas sent you new messages or when it's thecontact's birthday.§Check out who's online in Google Talk. Onlinestatus icons are displayed if you’re signed in toGoogle Talk on HTC Explorer. For example, means the contact is available to chat.Filtering your contacts listYou can choose to only display contacts from particular account types (for example,Google contacts or Facebook contacts).1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the People tab, tap on the top bar to show a list of your online accounts.3. Choose the online accounts that contain the contacts you want to display inyour contacts list, and then press to save your selection.4. To set more options on sorting your contacts, press and then tap Settings.61 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting up your profileStore your personal contact information to easily send it to other people.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Do one of the following:§If you're logged in to any of your online accounts such as your GoogleAccount or Facebook for HTC Sense, tap your name or email address, andthen tap Edit my contact card.§If you're not logged in to your online accounts, tap Me, and then choosewhether to link your profile to an existing contact entry that alreadycontains your personal information or edit your profile.3. Enter or edit your name and contact details.4. Tap or your photo, and then choose whether to take your self-portrait or useanother photo for your profile.5. Tap Save.What you can see on your profileWhen you tap My profile, you'll see the following tabs:DetailsShows your own contact details. You'll also see your most recent posts in yoursocial network (such as Facebook if you're signed in to Facebook for HTCSense).From this tab, you can edit your profile or share it with others.Updates and eventsShows the updates and events that you've posted in your social network .GalleryShows your Facebook albums and photos.Importing contacts from your SIM cardWhen you import SIM contacts, you can either store them on HTC Explorer or addthem to your Google contacts or Exchange ActiveSync contacts, if you have set upthe relevant accounts.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Import/Export > Import from SIM card.3. If you have Google or Exchange ActiveSync accounts set up on HTC Explorer,tap the type for the imported contacts.62 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Do one of the following:§Tap one or more SIM contacts you want to import.§To import all contacts, tap Select all.5. Tap Save.Adding a new contact1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Tap .3. Tap the Name field, and then enter the contact name. Tap if you want to separately enter the contact's first, middle, and last name.Depending on the contact type, you may also be able to add a name prefix (such asMr. or Ms.) or a name suffix (such as Ph.D., Jr, or Sr).4. Select the Contact type, for example Google or Exchange ActiveSync. Thisdetermines which account the contact will sync with. Some fields may not be available when you’re adding contacts to your SIM card.5. Enter the contact information in the fields provided. Press if you want to close the onscreen keyboard first and easily scrollthrough the other fields.6. Tap Save.Searching for contactsIn addition to searching contacts by name or email address, you can set the Peopleapp to search by other criteria such as by their group name or company.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Settings > Search contacts by.3. Choose the types of criteria to search for, and then tap Done.When performing your search, simply enter the first few characters of the item you'relooking for in the search box. Matching contacts will then be listed.63 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Importing a contact from an ExchangeActiveSync accountYou can search for a work contact from your Exchange ActiveSync account, and thencopy it on HTC Explorer.You need to have your Exchange ActiveSync account set up on HTC Explorer first.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. In the search box, enter the first few letters of the contact's name or emailaddress.3. Tap . Under Company contacts, matching names are listed.4. Tap the name of the contact you want copied on HTC Explorer, and then tapSave to People.64 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Merging contact informationIf you have the same contacts on HTC Explorer, Google Account, and your socialnetwork account such as Facebook, HTC Explorer will try to combine themautomatically or let you decide which contacts to combine. Combining the samecontacts avoids duplicate entries in your contacts list.Accepting matched contacts suggestionsWhen HTC Explorer finds contacts that can be merged, you’ll see a link icon inthe notifications area of the status bar.1. Slide the Notifications panel down, and then tap Matched contacts suggestion.You'll see a list of suggested contacts to merge.2. To merge, tap .3. Tap OK.If you don’t want to merge any of your contacts, tap Dismiss all.Viewing a list of all your linked contacts1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Linked contacts (or More > Linked contacts). The Alllinked contacts screen then opens where you can see the account types andinformation merged.3. You can choose to break the link of an account type or relink.4. When you're done, tap OK.Manually merging contact information1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) you want to link.65 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap or (if there are suggested links).4. You can:§Under Suggest links, tap to link the contact to an account.§Under Add contact, tap one of the options to link to another contact.Breaking the link1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Tap the name of the contact (not the icon or photo) whose link you want tobreak.3. Tap .4. Under the Linked contacts section, tap beside an account type to breakthe link.Backing up your contacts to the storage card1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Import/Export > Export to SD card.3. Select an account or type of contacts to export, then tap OK.Importing contacts from the storage cardYou can only import contacts that were exported to the storage card using theExport to SD card feature.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Import/Export > Import from SD card.3. If you have Google or Exchange ActiveSync accounts set up on HTC Explorer,tap the type for the imported contacts.Contact information and conversationsWhen you tap a contact on the People screen, the contact details screen opens,showing you the information you've stored or linked for that contact.The contact details screen has the following tabs:66 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
DetailsShows the information you have stored for the contact. Get in touch with thecontact directly by tapping any of the displayed methods. For example, if thecontact has a stored work phone number, tap Call work.ThreadShows SMS messages and emails you've received from the contact. It also listsall your incoming, outgoing, and missed calls to and from the contact.From this tab, you can reply to a message, send an email, or call the contact.UpdatesShows the contact’s updates and events from your social network account (forexample, Facebook).If you see a notification of the contact’s birthday under the Events section, youcan tap the notification and choose how you want to greet your contact, suchas to write on the person's Facebook wall.GalleryShows the linked contact’s Facebook albums and photos.Editing a contact’s information1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press and hold the contact, and then tap Edit contact. The contact details of your Facebook contacts cannot be edited.3. Enter the new information for the contact.4. Tap Save.Deleting contacts1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Delete.3. Select the contacts you want to remove, and then tap Delete.4. When prompted, tap OK.67 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Sending contact information as a vCardEasily share with others your own contact information or any contact fromHTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Do the any of the following:To send Do thisSomeone's contactinformationPress and hold the name of the contact (not the icon orphoto) whose contact information you want to send,and then tap Send contact as vCard.Your contactinformationPress and hold My profile, and then tap Send my profile.3. From the available options, choose how you want to send the vCard.4. Select the type of information you want to send, and then tap Send.Sending multiple contact cardsEasily share with others the contact information of several contacts from yourHTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. Press , and then tap Send contacts.3. Select the contacts whose contact information you want to share, and then tapSend. If you can't see the Send button while the onscreen keyboard is open, press toclose the keyboard.4. Choose how you want to send the contact cards:Bluetooth Tap Scan for devices, and then tap the device to which you want tosend the contact cards. Follow the onscreen messages onHTC Explorer and the other device to pair them and send the files.Mail Compose and send your email message, with the contact cardsattached.68 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Contact groupsAssign contacts to groups so you can easily send a message or email to a wholegroup. You can also sync groups on HTC Explorer with the groups in your Googleaccount, accessible via your computer’s web browser. We’ve also added the Frequentgroup as a special group type that automatically stores the contacts you dial or getcalls from the most.Creating a group1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Groups tab, tap .3. Enter a name for the group, and then tap .4. Select the contacts you want to add to the group, and then tap Save If your contacts list is long, you can use the search bar to search for contactsquickly, or press to hide the onscreen keyboard and scroll through the list.5. Tap to select a photo for the group.6. Tap Save.Editing a contact group1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Group tab, press and hold the group, and then tap Edit group.3. You can:§Tap the group name to change the name. You can only change the namefor groups that you have created.§Tap the icon to the left of the group name to change or remove the groupphoto.§To add contacts to the group, tap , select the contacts you want to add,and then tap Save.§To remove a contact from the group, tap the box beside the contact name.4. Tap Save.69 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Sending a message or email to a groupYou will be charged for each message sent. For example, if you send a message toa group of five people, you will be charged for five messages.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Group tab, tap the group you want to send a message or email to.3. Go to the Group action tab, and then do one of the following:§Tap Send group message to send a message to the group.§Tap Send group mail to send an email to the group.Rearranging your contact groups1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Groups tab, press , and then tap Edit group.3. Press and hold at the end of the group you want to move. When the row ishighlighted, drag it to its new position. 4. Tap Save.Rearranging the members of a contact group1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Groups tab, tap the group to see its members.3. Press , and then tap Edit group.4. Press and hold at the end of the contact’s name you want to move. Whenthe row is highlighted, drag it to its new position.5. Tap Save.70 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Deleting groupsYou can only delete groups that you have created.1. From the Home screen, tap > People.2. On the Groups tab, you can:§Press and hold a group you want to delete, and then tap Delete group.§Press and then tap Edit groups to choose several contact groups toremove.Adding People widgetsStay in touch with different circles of friends or colleagues in your life. You can addseveral People widgets on the Home screen, with a different group of contacts oneach widget.1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Personalize.2. On the Add to home tab, tap Widget > People.3. Choose the widget style, and then tap Select.4. Select the group you want to add as a widget.5. Repeat the above steps to add another People widget.Setting the default communication methodDepending on how you often reach your contacts, you can choose a differentcommunication method for each of the contacts on the People widget.1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.2. Tap a contact's name or status update (not the photo) on the widget to openthe person's contact details screen.71 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap Set default action, and then tap the communication method you want forthe contact.4. Press to return to the People widget on the Home screen.Changing the default communication method1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.2. Tap a contact's name or status update on the widget to open the person’scontact details screen.3. Tap Set default action.4. On the Select default action screen, tap the communication method you wantfor the contact.5. Press to return to the People widget on the Home screen.Getting in touch with a contact1. On the Home screen, go to the People widget.2. Tap a contact's photo (not the name or status update) on the widget. Thedefault communication method you've set for this contact will be performed.On the People widget:§Tap a contact's name or status update to open the contact details screen for thatcontact.§Tap to open the People app and view all your contacts.Adding group members to a People widgetYou can add more members to the contact group that's on a People widget.§To add just one member, tap .§To add several members, tap .72 PeopleHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
SocialFacebook for HTC SenseWith Facebook for HTC Sense, you can:§See all your Facebook contacts and their instant status updates in People.When you tap a contact in People, slide to theUpdates tab to see updates such as posted statusmessages, uploads, and profile changes.When there is a notification of the contact’sbirthday, you can tap the notification to send agreeting.§See Facebook photos right on the Gallery app.You can also upload one or more photos toFacebook, then tag and add captions that go withit.When you’re viewing the albums of a Facebookfriend, you can also share a link to a particularalbum, or comment on the album photos.§Check your friends’ Facebook status updates in Friend Stream™.§View your Facebook events and your friends’ birthdays on the Calendar app.73 SocialHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
§Signing in to your Facebook account from the Accounts & sync settings or theFacebook app (preinstalled or downloaded from Android Market) automaticallysigns you in to Facebook for HTC Sense.§You may need to authorize Facebook for HTC Sense to connect to your Facebookaccount.Enjoying Facebook in Friend StreamPost your status updates, write messages on your friends' Facebook walls, or shareyour location with your social network.Posting a message on a friend's Facebook wallQuickly write a wall post to your Facebook friends in Friend Stream.1. In Friend Stream, tap > Facebook.2. Tap > My wall, and then tap a friend from the list.3. Enter your message.4. Tap to attach a photo.5. Tap Post.Commenting on and liking Facebook postsTap someone’s status update on the All updates tab, and do any of the following: §Tap a photo or the album name shown in the statusupdate to view and comment on the album photosusing the Gallery app.§Tap Like to like the person’s status update.§Tap the text box, and then enter what you thinkabout the person’s status update.74 SocialHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Sharing your location with your Facebook friendsEating out in your fave restaurant? Tell your friends where you are and invite themalong.§You must be signed in to Facebook for HTC Sense to use this feature in FriendStream.§In order to find your location, you also need to enable location sources in Settings> Location.1. Go to the Locations tab, and then tap .2. Do any of the following:§Tap a place from the list.§Tap , type in your current location name and description, and then tapDone.3. Tap Check in.4. On the next screen, you can add your status message and even tag the friendsyou're with.5. When done, tap Check in.Chatting in Google TalkGoogle Talk is Google’s instant messaging program. It lets you communicate withother people that also use Google Talk. If you signed in to your Google Account whenyou first set up HTC Explorer, you are already signed in to Google Talk.To open Google Talk, on the Home screen tap > Talk.Chatting with a friend1. In Google Talk, tap a friend in the Friends list.2. Enter your message in the text box. You can also insert a smiley by pressing ,and then tapping More > Insert smiley.3. Tap Send.4. While chatting, press and then tap any of these options:Chat offrecordYour Google Talk messages are stored in the Chats folder ofyour Gmail account. Tap this option if you don’t want to storeyour chat messages.Switch chats If you have more than one chat going, tap to switch chat withanother friend.Friends list Return to the Friends list.75 SocialHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Add to chat Add another friend to your chat. The friend you invited andthe friend you're currently chatting will receive an invitation toa group chat. Each one who accepts the invitation joins thegroup chat.End chat End your current chat.More Clear the chat history, insert a smiley or view your friend’scontact details.Accepting a chat invitationWhen a friend sends you a Google Talk message, you receive a notification. Theirentry in the Friends list displays the message.Do one of the following:§In the Friends list, tap the friend who sent you the invitation to chat.§Open the Notifications panel, and then tap the chat notification.Changing your online status and picture1. In Google Talk's Friends list, tap your name to open the Set Status screen.2. Enter your new status message. Or press to choose a custom status fromthe list.3. Tap the online status beside your picture, and then select the status you wanton the menu.4. Tap your picture, and then do one of the following:§Tap Remove to remove your photo.§Tap Change to select another picture.5. Tap Done.Your online status, message, and picture appear in your contacts' Friends list and inother apps where your Google Talk status are displayed.76 SocialHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Adding and managing friendsThe Friends list is where you add and manage your friends in Google Talk.In Google Talk's Friends list, you can:Invite a friend 1. Press , and then tap Add friend.2. Enter the Google Talk instant messaging ID or Gmail address of thefriend you want to add.3. Tap Send invitation.View allfriendsInitially, only those friends that you often chat with — the mostpopular — are shown in the Friends list. To view all your friends,press , and then tap All friends. To view only friends that youoften chat with, press , and then tap Most popular.Make a friendpopular1. Press , and then tap All friends.2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then tap Always show friend.Block a friend You can block a friend from sending you messages. When blocked,your friend is removed from the Friends list and is added to theBlocked friends list.1. Press , and then tap All friends.2. Press and hold a friend’s name, and then tap Block friend.Unblock afriend1. Press , and then tap More > Blocked.2. Tap the friend you want to unblock and then tap OK.View allinvited friendsPress , and then tap More > Invites. Friends who have not yetaccepted your invitation are listed on the screen.Changing settings or signing outIn Google Talk's Friends list, press and then tap:§Settings to change the app and notification settings.§Sign out to sign out.77 SocialHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
CameraCamera basicsWhether traveling for business or fun, enjoy taking photos and videos of your trip andencounters with HTC Explorer.§To open the camera in photo mode and take photos, tap from the Homescreen, and then tap Camera.§To open the camera directly in video mode so you can immediately startcapturing videos, tap from the Home screen, and then tap Camcorder.Viewfinder screenYou’ll find the following onscreen controls on the Viewfinder screen:Zoom bar Photo/Video mode switchShutter release/Record buttonEffects buttonGallery button78 CameraHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
ZoomingBefore taking a photo or video, you can first use the onscreen zoom bar to zoom in orout of your subject.Simply slide your finger up or down the zoom bar to zoom in or out. When you're recording video, the zoom bar is always shown onscreen. You can freelyzoom in or out while recording.Taking your closeup shotHaving a hard time taking your own closeup shot? With the camera, it's easy. Just setit to automatically take your self portrait. You won't even need to tap the shutterrelease button.1. Press to open the settings menu panel.2. Tap Self-portrait.3. Press to close the settings menu panel.4. Turn the camera to face you.Once the camera detects your face, it automatically focuses and takes your photo.Taking a photo1. From the Home screen, tap > Camera.2. Before taking the photo, you can zoom in or out first on your subject.3. Choose the resolution and other camera settings you want to use.4. Choose an effect to apply to your photo.5. Point the camera and focus on your subject.6. When you're ready to take the photo, tap .7. Choose what you want to do with the photo you’ve just taken.79 CameraHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Recording video1. From the Home screen, tap > Camcorder.2. Choose the video quality and other camera settings you want to use.3. Choose an effect to apply to your video.4. Frame your subject on the Viewfinder screen.5. Tap to start recording.6. You can freely zoom in or out while recording video.7. To stop recording, tap again.8. Choose what you want to do with the video you’ve just recorded.Adding effectsWant to make your photos look more interesting? Easy. Use the available cameraeffects to make your photos look like they’ve been taken through special lenses andfilters. You can also add certain effects to videos.Choose an effect first before you start taking a photo or video.1. Tap .2. Scroll through the available effects and tap one that you like.After capturingAfter capturing a photo or video, the Review screen will display the photo or thestarting image of the video that you have just captured. Tap the onscreen buttons tochoose what you want to do next.Delete the photo or videoSend the photo or video to your computer or another device using Bluetooth,send it by email, or select a social network where you want to upload it to.Choose how you want to use the photo, such as by setting it as your wallpaper.Watch the video.80 CameraHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Changing camera settingsOpen the menu panel to access and change camera settings.To open the camera settings, press .Self-portrait (photomode only)Select this option to take your own closeup shot.Self-timer (photo modeonly)Set a time delay before your camera automatically takesthe photo.Image adjustments Slide your finger across each of the slider bars to adjust theexposure, contrast, saturation, and sharpness.White balance White balance enables the camera to capture colors moreaccurately by adjusting to your current lightingenvironment.Resolution/VideoqualityChoose a photo or video resolution to use.ISO (photo mode only) Choose an ISO level or set it back to Auto. Higher ISOnumbers are better for taking pictures in low lightconditions.Review duration Set the time for a captured photo or video to be displayedon the Review screen before the camera changes back tothe Viewfinder screen.Widescreen (photomode only)When this check box is selected (default), photo resolutionsavailable for selection are in 3:2 ratio and you can use theentire Viewfinder screen to frame your subject. When notselected, photo resolutions available for selection are instandard 4:3 ratio.Geo-tag photos (photomode only)Select to store GPS location in your captured photos.Auto enhance (photomode only)Select to reduce noise when using a high ISO setting and toautomatically adjust photo brightness.Shutter sound Select to play a sound when you press the shutter releaseor record button.Grid (photo modeonly)Select to display a grid on the Viewfinder screen so you caneasily frame and center your subject before taking thephoto.Record with audio(video mode only)Select to record audio when capturing videos.Reset to default Change the camera settings back to default.81 CameraHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Photos, videos, and musicGalleryAbout the Gallery appRelive the fun while viewing photos and videos of your latest travels or your pet’snewest tricks. Get an audience by tagging your Facebook friends.To start using Gallery, check first if you have photos or videos copied onHTC Explorer.What’s more, you can edit and add effects to your photos. You can also easily use aphoto as your contact icon, location icon, or wallpaper.Selecting an albumFrom the Home screen, tap > Gallery. The Gallery app opens on the Albums screenwhere your photos and videos are organized by albums for easy viewing.82 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Viewing photos and videosAfter you’ve selected an album, you can browse through your photos and videos.Slide your finger up or down to scroll through the thumbnails. Tap a photo or video toview it in full screen. While viewing a photo in full screen, you can press , and then tap Show on mapto see the location where you took the photo. (Show on map is available whenyou've enabled Geo-tag photos in Camera.)Zooming in or out on a photoThere are two ways you can zoom in or out of a photo.§Tap the screen twice quickly to zoom in, then tap the screen twice quickly againto zoom out.§Press your thumb and index finger on the screen and then spread your fingersapart to zoom in; pinch your fingers together to zoom out. Viewing photos as a slideshow1. Select an album that has the photos you want to view as a slideshow.2. Tap Slideshow. Tap the screen to show the playback controls.83 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Watching videosWhile browsing an album, tap a video to play it. Another way to easily get to your videos is to tap from the Homescreen, andthen tap Videos.§Use the onscreen controls to play, pause, or stop the video.§Tap More > Full screen or More > Best fit to toggle between full and best-fitscreens.Editing your photosDo basic editing tasks on your photos such as rotate and crop. You can also enhanceyour photos by applying effects such as high contrast, vintage, and more.Rotating a photo1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to rotate.3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap either Rotate left or Rotate right.Cropping a photo1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to crop.3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap Crop. You’ll see a crop boxaround the photo.4. To adjust the crop box size, press and hold the edge of the box. 84 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
5. When directional arrows appear, drag your finger inward or outward to resizethe crop box.6. To move the crop box to the part of the photo that you want to crop, drag thecrop box to the desired position.7. Tap Save to keep the changes.The cropped photo is saved as a copy. The original photo remains unedited.Adding effects1. On the Gallery app’s Albums screen, tap an album.2. Press and hold on the photo that you want to add effects to.3. In the menu that opens, tap Edit, and then tap Effects. On the panel that opens,you’ll see options available to you.4. Tap an effect to apply on the photo.5. Tap Save to keep the changes.The enhanced photo is saved as a copy. The original photo remains unedited.Sending your photos and videosSend photos and videos via email or MMS to your computer or another device usingBluetooth.Sending photos or videos by emailYou can send several photos, videos, or both in an email message. They are added asfile attachments in your email.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap Gmail or Mail.4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.5. Compose your message and then tap (Gmail) or Send (Mail).If you selected Mail and you have multiple email accounts, the default emailaccount will be used.Sending a photo or video by MMS1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap Messages.85 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Tap the photo or video you want to send. The photo or video is automaticallyadded into the MMS message.5. To add another photo or video to your slideshow attachment, tap and thentap Picture or Video.6. Compose your message and then tap Send.Sending photos or videos using BluetoothYou can select several photos, videos, or both and send them to someone’s device oryour computer using Bluetooth.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap Bluetooth.4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer andconnect to the receiving Bluetooth device so the files can be sent.Sharing your photos and videos on the WebUsing the Gallery app, you can share photos and videos on your social networks. Andyou can post videos on YouTube.You can also use the Camera or Camcorder app to share a photo or video rightafter you’ve captured it.Sharing photos or videos on FacebookYou need to be logged in to your account to be able to upload photos or videos.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the photos or videos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap Facebook for HTC Sense.4. Select the photos or videos you want to share and then tap Next.5. Select which album to upload to and set privacy settings for the uploadedphotos or videos.6. Tap Add tag and description, and then enter a different caption on each photoor video.7. To tag friends on your photos, tap Tag this photo. You can then tap the partwhere your friend is, and then select who you want to tag from the list. Repeatthis step to continue tagging friends.86 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
8. Slide to the left to go to the next photo or video. When finished adding tags anddescriptions, tap Done.9. Tap Done.Sharing photos on PicasaYou need to be signed in to a Google Account to be able to upload photos to thePicasa™ photo organizing service.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the photos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap Picasa.4. Select the photos you want to share and then tap Next.5. Enter a caption for the photos you're uploading.6. Select the online album where you want to upload the photos, or tap tocreate a new album.7. Tap Upload.Sharing videos on YouTubeYou can share your videos by uploading them to YouTube.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the album that has the videos you want to share.3. Tap and then tap YouTube.4. Select the videos you want to share and then tap Next. Sign in to your YouTubeor Google Account, if you’re asked to do so.5. Enter a title for the videos you're uploading.6. Tap More details where you can enter information such as description and tags,and select a privacy option.7. Tap Upload.87 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Viewing photos in your social networksRight in the Gallery app, check what you and your friends have uploaded to yoursocial networks.Viewing photos on FacebookYou need to be logged in to your Facebook account to view Facebook photos.1. From the Home screen, tap > Gallery.2. Tap the Facebook tab.3. Tap your account name or your friend’s account on the list to view the photos inthe account.You can view photos in your online albums in the same way as you view photos onyour storage card.Commenting on photos in your social networksAdd comments to your uploaded photos as well as your friends’ photos.1. Do one of the following:§While browsing online albums, press and hold a photo and then tap Addcomment.§While viewing a photo in full screen, tap anywhere on the screen, and thentap .2. Tap the box that says “Write a comment.”3. Enter your text, and then tap Comment.88 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
MusicListening to musicEnjoy listening to songs and music on HTC Explorer using the Music app.You need to copy music files to your storage card first to use the Music app to playmusic.1. From the Home screen, tap > Music. The Music app opens in the Now playingscreen.2. Swipe your finger left or right across the screen to go to the next or previousmusic album.3. Tap the onscreen icons to control music playback, select a song to play, repeatsongs, and more.Turn shuffle on or off. (Shuffle is off whenbutton is gray.)Press and drag your finger across theprogress bar to jump to any part of thesong.Go to the library.Switch between showing the Now playinglist and Now playing screen. You canrearrange songs in the Now playing list.Cycle through the repeat modes: repeat allsongs, repeat current song, and don’trepeat.Playing music from the Lock screenWhen you’re listening to music and the screen turns off, press POWER to turn thescreen back on and control the music playback directly on the Lock screen.If you don’t see the playback controls on the Lock screen, swipe your finger from leftto right on the box onscreen.89 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
You can also pause music playback right from the Notifications panel.About the Music widgetYou can use the Music widget to play music right from your Home screen.Browsing music in the library1. Tap on the Music app’s Now playing screen or Now playing list to go to thelibrary. In the library, your music is organized by categories such as Artists andAlbums. Choose a category by tapping one of the tabs at the bottom of thescreen.2. Tap a song in a category to play it. The Now playing list is updated with thesong list from your selected category.You can add, remove, or rearrange the tabs in the library.Creating a playlistPersonalize your music experience by creating music playlists. Make a playlistcontaining just your favorite songs or create one to match your mood for the day.You can make as many playlists as you like.1. From the Home screen, tap > Music.2. Tap to go to the library.3. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlistscategory.4. Tap .5. Enter a playlist name, and then tap Add songs to playlist.6. Choose a category.90 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
7. Select the check boxes of songs you want to add to the playlist and then tapAdd.8. Tap Save.Playing the songs in a playlist1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlistscategory.2. Tap a playlist to open it.3. Tap the first song or any song in the playlist.When you tap a song in the list to play it, the Now playing screen is updated with thesongs from your playlist.Managing playlistsAfter creating a playlist, you can add more songs to it, rearrange their order, andmore.1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlistscategory.2. Tap a playlist to open it.3. Press , and then choose what you want to do:Add more songs toa playlist1. Tap Add songs.2. Go to the Songs category or any other category.3. Select the songs you want to add to the playlist andthen tap Add.Rearrange songs 1. Tap Change order.2. Press and hold at the end of the song title you wantto move. When the row is highlighted, drag it to its newposition, then release.Delete songs from aplaylist1. Tap Remove songs.2. Select the songs you want to delete and then tapRemove.Change playlistnameTap Rename playlist.Deleting playlists1. In the library, tap or slide your finger on the bottom row to go to the Playlistscategory.2. Press and then tap Delete playlists.3. Select the playlists to delete and then tap Delete.91 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting a song as a ringtoneYou can set a song from the Music app's library as your regular ringtone or asringtone for a certain contact.1. From the Home screen, tap > Music.2. Browse for the song that you want to set as a ringtone and then play it back.3. On the Now playing screen, press and then tap Set as ringtone (or More >Set as ringtone) .4. In the Set as ringtone options menu, tap Phone ringtone or Contact ringtone. Ifyou select Contact ringtone, you need to choose the contacts you want toassociate the song with in the next screen.Checking if the song was added as a ringtone1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. On the Settings screen, tap Sound > Phone ringtone.The song should be in the ringtone list and selected.Sharing music using BluetoothYou can choose a song from the Music app’s library and send it to someone’s deviceor your computer using Bluetooth.1. From the Home screen, tap > Music.2. Tap to go to the library.3. In the library, choose the song that you want to send via Bluetooth and thenplay it back.4. On the Now playing screen, press and then tap Share (or More > Share).5. Tap Bluetooth.In the next few steps, you’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer andconnect to the receiving Bluetooth device so the music can be sent.Finding music videos on YouTubeYou can find music videos of the song you’re listening to on YouTube. It’s simple. Onthe Now playing screen, just press and then tap Find videos.92 Photos, videos, and musicHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Android Market and otherappsFinding and installing apps from AndroidMarketAndroid Market is the place to go to find new apps for HTC Explorer. Choose from awide variety of free and paid apps ranging from productivity apps, entertainment, togames.A Google Checkout™ payment method is required to purchase a paid app. You willbe asked to confirm method of payment when you purchase an app.Finding and installing an appWhen you install apps and use them on HTC Explorer, they may require access toyour personal information or access to certain functions or settings. Download andinstall only apps that you trust.Be cautious when downloading apps that have access to functions or a significantamount of your data on HTC Explorer. You’re responsible for the results of usingdownloaded apps.You need a Google Checkout™ account to purchase items on Android Market.1. From the Home screen, tap > Market.2. Do any of the following to find an app:Browse featuredappsScroll through the list of featured apps.Browse apps bycategoriesTap Apps or Games, and then tap a category. Under acategory, you can filter the apps by Top paid, Top freeor Just in.Search for an app Press , enter the name or type of app you’re lookingfor, and then tap .3. When you find the app that you like, tap it and read its description and userreviews.93 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. To download or purchase the app, tap FREE (for free apps) or the price buttonunder Buy (for paid apps).5. Tap OK to accept the permissions for the app and begin downloading andinstalling the app.You can uninstall an app for a refund within a limited time after your purchase. Toknow more about the refund policy for paid apps, please visit the Android MarketHelp site (http://market.android.com/support).Opening an installed appDo one of the following:§If you see this icon on the status bar, open the Notifications panel, and thentap the app.§From the Home screen, tap > Market. Press and then tap My apps. On theMy apps screen, tap the app, and then tap Open.§From the Home screen, tap . On the All apps screen, slide to the Downloadedtab, and then tap the app.Uninstalling an appYou can uninstall any app that you have downloaded and installed from AndroidMarket.1. From the Home screen, tap > Market.2. Press and then tap My apps.3. Tap the app you want to uninstall, and then tap Uninstall.4. When asked, tap OK.5. Choose the reason for removing the app, and then tap OK.Getting helpIf you need help or have questions about Android Market, press , and then tapHelp. The web browser will take you to the Android Market Help site.94 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using the ClockAbout the HTC Clock widgetUse the HTC Clock widget to see your current date, time, and location. You can alsouse the Clock to show the time in another city.Changing the location on the Clock widgetBy default, the Clock widget on the Home screen displays your current weather. Youcan customize the Clock widget on your Home screen to show the weather of anotherlocation.1. Press and hold the clock on the Home screen, and then drag it to the button.2. Tap the clock to change its settings.3. Choose a city. If you don't see the city that you want, tap to search for it and add it.4. Tap Done.Using the Clock appGet more from the Clock app than just the regular date and time. Use HTC Explorer asa desk clock complete with weather information or as a world clock so you can seewhat time it is in several cities across the globe. You can also use it as an alarm clock,stopwatch, and countdown timer.To open the Clock app, do one of the following:§Tap the Clock widget on the Home screen.§From the Home screen, tap and then tap Clock.Tap the tabs on the bottom row or slide your finger across the tabs to switchbetween the different functions of the Clock app.Using Desk ClockThe Desk Clock displays the current date, time, and weather. It also shows an alarmclock indicator.Tap the weather image or information to open the Weather app where you can seeweather forecasts for the next few days.Using World ClockUse the Clock app's World Clock tab to check the current time in several placesaround the globe. You can also set your home city, add more cities to the world clocklist, and manually set your time zone, date, and time.95 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting your home city1. On the World Clock tab, press and then tap Home settings.2. Enter your home city’s name. As you enter letters, the list is filtered to showmatching cities and countries.3. Scroll through the list and tap your home city.Setting the time zone, date, and timeTo set the time zone, date, and time on HTC Explorer manually, you need to turn offauto time sync first.1. On the World Clock tab, press and then tap Local time settings.2. Clear the Automatic check box, and then set the time zone, date, and time asrequired.From the Home screen, you can also press and then tap Settings > Date & timeto open the Date & time settings screen.Adding a city to the World Clock screenAdd more cities to the World Clock screen so you can instantly check the date andtime in these cities.1. On the World Clock tab, tap .2. Enter the city name you want to add. As you enter letters, the list is filtered toshow matching cities and countries.3. Scroll through the matching list and tap the city that you want to add.Setting an alarmYou can use the Clock app's Alarms tab to set up one or more wake-up alarms.1. On the Alarms tab, select the check box of an alarm and then tap that alarm.2. Under Set alarm, drag your finger up or down to roll the time scroll wheels andset the alarm time.96 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Choose from the available options. You can:§Enter the alarm Description and choose the Alarm sound to use.§Tap Repeat. Select which days of the week to sound the alarm, and thentap OK.§Select the Vibrate check box if you want HTC Explorer to also vibrate whenthe alarm goes off.4. After you've finished setting the alarm, tap Done.§To turn off an alarm, clear the check box of that alarm.§If you need to set more than three alarms, tap .Deleting an alarm1. On the Alarms tab, press and then tap Delete.2. Select the alarms you want to delete and then tap Delete.Changing alarm sound settingsOn the Alarms tab, press and then tap Settings. You can change the followingsettings:Alarm in silentmodeSelected by default, this option allows the alarm to sound evenwhen the volume is set to silent. Clear this check box if you want tosilence the alarm when HTC Explorer is in silent mode.Alarm volume Set the volume level that you want for the alarm.SnoozedurationSet how long to snooze between alarms.Side buttonbehaviorChoose what happens to the alarm when pressing the side button(VOLUME UP/VOLUME DOWN). You can set the button to snooze,dismiss the alarm, or disable the button. The side button works onlywhen the screen is not locked.97 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Checking WeatherUse the Weather app and widget to check the current weather and weather forecastsfor the next few days. In addition to your current location, you can view weatherforecasts for other cities around the globe. Your settings in the Weather app alsocontrol the weather information that is shown in the Clock and Calendar.For HTC Explorer to detect your current location and display your local weather inthe Weather app and widget as well as in Clock and Calendar:§You need to connect to the Internet.§Location services must be enabled. If you didn't enable it when you first set upHTC Explorer, you can do so in Settings > Location.1. From the Home screen, tap > Weather.2. Swipe your finger up or down the screen to check the weather in other cities.3. While viewing forecasts, you can:§Swipe your finger up or down the screen to check the weather in othercities.§Tap to update the weather information at any time.Adding a city to the Weather screenAdd more cities to the Weather screen so you can instantly check the weatherforecasts in these cities. In addition to your current location, the Weather screen candisplay up to fifteen cities.1. On the Weather screen, tap . Or press and then tap Add.2. Enter the location you want to add. As you type, the list is filtered to show thepossible locations based on the letters you entered.3. Tap the desired city to select it.Changing the order of cities on the Weather screen1. On the Weather screen, press and then tap Rearrange.2. Press and hold at the end of the item you want to move. When the row ishighlighted, drag it to its new position, then release.3. Tap Done.Deleting cities from the Weather screen1. On the Weather screen, press and then tap Delete.2. Select the cities you want to remove and then tap Delete.98 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Changing Weather options1. On the Weather screen, press and then tap Settings.2. You can change the following weather settings:Update when opened Select this check box to refresh weather updates everytime you open the Weather app.Update automatically Select this check box to automatically downloadweather updates.Update schedule Set an auto update schedule.Temperature scale Choose whether to display the temperature in Celsius orFahrenheit.Sound effects Choose whether to play sound effects related to theweather conditions.About the Weather widgetUse the Weather widget to instantly check weather forecasts of your current locationand other cities without having to open the Weather app. The Weather widget comesin different looks and styles.You can add this widget to the Home screen, if it’s not yet added.Watching videos on YouTubeUse the YouTube app to check out what’s popular on the online video-sharingwebsite.1. From the Home screen, tap > YouTube.2. Scroll through the list of videos, and then tap a video to watch it.3. While watching a video, you can:§Turn HTC Explorer sideways or double-tap the screen to watch the video infull screen.§Tap the video screen to pause, resume playback, or drag the slider to jumpto a different part of the video.§Tap a tab to learn more about the video, see related videos, or check outwhat other viewers think. You can also slide your finger across the tabs tosee if there are more items available.§Tap the thumbs-up or thumbs-down icon to add your video rating. TapMore to see other options.4. Press , and then tap Home to return to the YouTube main screen.99 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Searching for videos1. On the YouTube main screen, tap .2. Enter a search keyword, and then tap .3. Scroll through the results and tap a video to watch it. You also have the option to show results that were just recently posted. Tap Alltime, and then select a time period you want.Clearing the search history1. On the YouTube main screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Clear search history, and then tap OK when prompted.Sharing a video link1. On the video’s watch screen, tap More > Share.2. Choose how you want to share the video link from the available options.Capturing and sharing videos on YouTube1. From the Home screen, tap > YouTube. Or if YouTube is already open, return to its main screen.2. Tap .3. Tap to start capturing video.4. When you're finished capturing, tap again, and then tap Done.5. Enter a title for your video.6. Tap More details to select the YouTube account you want to use, add adescription, set the privacy level, and add tags or location information to yourvideo.7. Tap Upload.Listening to FM RadioTune in and listen to your favorite radio stations using the FM Radio app.You need to connect a headset first to the audio jack of HTC Explorer to use FMRadio. FM Radio uses the stereo headset as the FM radio antenna.From the Home screen, tap > FM Radio.The first time you open FM Radio, it automatically scans for available FM stations,saves them as presets, and plays the first FM station found.100 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Tuning in to an FM stationThere are several things you can do while you’re on the FM Radio screen:§Tap to view the All presets list, and then select a station you want to listen to.§Tap to go to the previous available FM station, or to go to the nextavailable FM station.§Drag the slider to tune in to a frequency on the FM band.§Tap to fine tune the radio frequency by -0.1 MHz or to fine tune the radiofrequency by +0.1 MHz.§Tap to add a preset name for the current station you are tuned into.§Press the VOLUME UP and VOLUME DOWN buttons to adjust the volume.§To repeat scanning and saving of FM stations, press , and then tap Scan &Save.§Press to mute the sound or to change the sound output to Mono or Stereo.You can also switch the sound output between the Speaker and Headset.Closing or turning off FM RadioYou can continue listening to the radio while using other apps on HTC Explorer orclose the FM Radio app completely.To Do thisTo close the FM RadioscreenPress . FM Radio continues to run in thebackground.To go back to the FM Radio screen, slide open theNotifications panel, and then tap FM Radio.To turn off completely andclose FM RadioTap on the FM Radio screen.Recording your voiceDon’t just think out loud. Use Voice Recorder to quickly capture your thoughts. Youcan also record your voice and set it as a ringtone.1. From the Home screen, tap > Voice Recorder.2. Hold the microphone near your mouth.3. Tap to start recording a voice clip. Voice Recorder can run on the background while you do other things onHTC Explorer, except when you open other apps that also use audio functions. Togo back to the Voice Recorder screen, slide open the Notifications panel, and thentap Voice Recorder.4. Tap to stop recording.5. Type a name for the voice clip and tap Save.101 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
6. To play back the voice clip, tap .7. To show options for sharing, deleting, or renaming the voice clip, press .Sharing a voice clip1. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap .2. Press and hold the voice clip you want to share, and then tap Share.3. From the available options, choose how you want to share the voice clip.Setting a voice clip as a ringtone1. On the Voice Recorder screen, tap .2. Press and hold the voice clip you want to set as a ringtone, and then tap Set asringtone.Sharing games and appsHaving fun with a game or app that you found from Android Market? Share yourfavorite games and apps instantly with your circle of friends.For your friends to link to the app and download it from Android Market, they mustbe using an Android device.1. From the Home screen, tap .2. Press , and then tap Share. You’ll then see the list of games and apps thatyou downloaded and installed from Android Market.3. Tap an app, and then choose how to share it.When your friends see the link in your sent message, email, or status update, they cansimply tap the link to go directly to the game or app in Android Market to download it.102 Android Market and other appsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
MessagesOpening MessagesKeep in touch with important people in your life. Use the Messages app to composeand send text (SMS) and multimedia messages (MMS).From the Home screen, tap > Messages. The All messages screen opens, where allyour sent and received messages are neatly grouped into conversations, by contactname or phone number.§Scroll up or down the list of conversations byswiping your finger on the screen.§Tap a contact name or number to view the exchangeof messages.You can also view your messages on the Home screen with the Messages widget.Sending a text message (SMS)1. From the Home screen, tap > Messages.2. Tap .3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:§Enter the first few letters of a contact name or starting digits of a mobilenumber. As you type, matching names with phone numbers from yourstored contacts are displayed. Tap a name or one of the contact’s numbers.§Tap , and then select the phone numbers of the contacts to whom youwant to send the message. You can also select contact groups asrecipients.§Enter the complete phone numbers directly in the To field.103 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message. §There is a limit on the number of characters for a single text message (displayedabove the Send button). If you exceed the limit, your text message will bedelivered as one but will be billed as more than one message.§Your text message automatically becomes a multimedia message if you enter anemail address as the recipient, add a message subject, attach an item, or composea very long message.5. Tap Send, or press to save the message as a draft.Sending a multimedia message (MMS)1. From the Home screen, tap > Messages.2. Tap .3. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:§Enter the first few letters of a contact name or starting digits of a mobilenumber. As you type, matching names with phone numbers and emailaddresses from your stored contacts are displayed. Tap a contact’s numberor email address.§Tap , and then select the phone numbers of the contacts to whom youwant to send the message. You can also select contact groups asrecipients.§Enter the complete phone numbers or email address directly in the To field.4. To add a subject line, press and then tap Add subject.5. Tap the box that says Add text, and then enter your message.104 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
6. Tap and then choose the type of attachment.Picture Take a photo and attach it, or attach an existing photo.Video Record a video and attach it, or attach an existingvideo.Audio Make a voice recording and attach it, or attach anexisting audio file.App recommendation Choose an app you’ve installed from Android Marketthat you want to share with others. The URL fromwhich the app can be downloaded will be inserted toyour message.Location Add your current location (requires GPS to be turnedon), or a location you pick on a map to your message.Contact (vCard) Select a contact, and then select the information toattach.Appointment(vCalendar)Select the calendar event you want to attach.After adding an attachment, tap to see options for replacing, viewing orremoving your attachment.7. Tap Send, or press to save the message as a draft.Why isn't the contact's email address showing up when I enter acontact name?If only phone numbers are showing up when you're entering a contact name,go to the Messages settings to enable displaying email addresses.1. If you've created a new message, press first to return to the Allmessages screen.2. Press and then tap Settings > General.3. Select the Show email address check box.Creating a slideshow1. After you've added either a photo, video, or audio in the multimedia messageyou’re composing, tap > Slideshow.2. Choose where you want to insert the next slide.105 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Right after adding a slide, do any of the following:Add a photo or video to aslideTap , and then choose to add a photo or avideo.Add music or a voicerecording to a slideTap > Audio.Add a caption to a slide Tap Add text and then enter your caption.Edit a slide Tap , and then choose to replace, remove, orset the duration of the slide.Preview the slideshow Press , and then tap Preview (or More >Preview). Tap once on the preview screen tosee playback controls.4. When finished, tap Send, or press to save the message as a draft.Resuming a draft message1. On the All messages screen, press , and then tap Drafts.2. Tap the message and then resume editing it.3. Tap Send.Viewing and replying to a messageDepending on your notification settings, HTC Explorer plays a sound, vibrates, ordisplays the message briefly in the status bar when you receive a new message. Anew message icon is also displayed in the status bar.1. To open and read the message, you can:§Press and hold the status bar, and then slide your finger down to open theNotifications panel. Then tap the new message notification.§Go to the Messages app and open the message.2. While reading the message, you can reply with a text or multimedia message.You can also do the following while reading the message:§Call the phone number contained in the message by tapping the number.§Tap the email address contained in the message to send an email.106 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
§Tap a link in the message to open it in the web browser.§Tap the message to open the options menu and choose what you want to dowith the message (such as forward, share, and more).Adjusting the font size of your messagesWhile reading a message conversation with a contact, spread out two fingers on thescreen to zoom in and make the text size bigger. Pinch the screen to zoom out.You can also press , and then tap More > Text size.Replying to another phone number of the contactWhen a contact has multiple phone numbers stored on HTC Explorer, you’ll see theparticular phone number used below the contact's name.Keep in mind that your response will be sent to the phone number of the latestmessage you’ve received from this contact.1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap , and then select another phone number of this contact.3. Tap the box that says Add text, then enter your reply message.4. Tap Send.Forwarding a message1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to view theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message you want to forward, and then tap Forward.107 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. In the To field, fill in one or more recipients.4. Tap Send.While viewing the exchange of messages with the contact, you can also press ,tap Forward (or More > Forward), and then tap the message you want to forward.Viewing and saving an attachment from amultimedia messageIf you are concerned about the size of your data downloads, check the multimediamessage size first before you download it.When Auto-retrieve in MMS settings is disabled, only the message header isdownloaded. To download the entire message, tap the Download button at theright side of the message.§If there’s a media attachment such as a photo or video in a received message,tap it to view the content.§If the attachment is a contact (vCard), tap it to view the contact information,then tap Save to add to your contacts.§If the attachment is an appointment or event (vCalendar), tap it to choose thecalendar where to save it, and then tap Import.§To save the attachment to your storage card, press and hold the multimediamessage, and then choose to save the type of attachment from the optionsmenu.Push messagesPush messages contain a web link. Often, the link will be to download a file that youhave requested from a service provider.When you receive a push message, a notification icon is displayed in the statusbar.Opening and reading a new push message1. Press and hold the status bar, and then slide the status bar down to open theNotifications panel.2. Tap the new message.3. Tap Visit website.108 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Viewing all your push messages1. From the Home screen, tap > Messages.2. Press , and then tap Push messages. You can only see this option if you've previously received push messages.Managing message conversationsProtecting a message from deletionYou can lock a message so that it will not be deleted even if you delete the othermessages in the conversation.1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message that you want to lock.3. Tap Lock message on the options menu. A lock icon is displayed at the righthand side of the message.Copying a text message to your SIM card1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message, and then tap Copy to SIM. A SIM card icon is displayed atthe right hand side of the message.Deleting a single message1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Tap the message that you want to delete.3. If the message is locked, tap Unlock message on the options menu, and then tapthe message to display the options menu again.4. Tap Delete message on the options menu.5. When prompted to confirm, tap OK.Deleting several messages within a conversation1. On the All messages screen, tap a contact (or phone number) to display theexchange of messages with that contact.2. Press and then tap Delete (or More > Delete).109 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap Delete by selection. You can also tap Delete by phone number if the contact used multiple phonenumbers throughout the conversation and you want to delete the messages sentfrom a particular number.4. Select the messages you want to delete and then tap Delete.In the settings, you can set the Messages app to auto delete old messages perconversation.Deleting a conversation1. Do any of the following:§On the All messages screen, press and hold a contact (or phone number)whose messages you want to delete, and then tap Delete§While looking at the exchange of messages in a conversation, press andthen tap Delete > Delete thread (or More > Delete > Delete thread).Any locked messages in the conversation thread will not be deleted unlessyou select the Delete locked messages check box.2. When prompted to confirm, tap OK to delete the entire thread.Deleting several conversations1. On the All messages screen, press and then tap Delete.2. Select the conversation threads you want to delete.3. Tap Delete. Any locked messages will not be deleted.Backing up your text messages to the storagecard1. From the Home screen, tap > Messages.2. Press , and then tap Backup SMS > Backup SMS.3. Enter a name for your backup file, and then tap OK.Importing text messages from the storage cardYou can only import text messages that were exported to the storage card using theBackup SMS feature.1. From the Home screen, tap > Messages.2. Press , and then tap Backup SMS > Restore from backup.3. Tap the backup file to import.4. Tap OK.110 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting message optionsOn the All messages screen, press and then tap Settings.Notifications §Receive a notification in the status bar and set HTC Explorer tovibrate or play a sound when a message arrives or when a messageis not sent successfully, and choose a notification sound.§Allow HTC Explorer to show pop-up notifications on the screenwhen messages are sent successfully or not, or disable this option.§If you don't want the content of received text messages to appearon the lock screen and status bar, clear the Notification previewcheck box.Textmessages(SMS)§Receive a report on the delivery status of your message.§View or change the message service center number used. (Werecommend that you don't change the number here as it may causeproblems in receiving and sending messages.)§View or delete text messages stored on your SIM card, or copy SIMcard messages to device memory.Multimediamessages(MMS)§Receive a report on the delivery status of your message.§Receive a report whether each recipient has read the message ordeleted it without reading.§Automatically download complete MMS messages including themessage body and attachments in your service area and whenroaming.§Set the message priority and maximum file size of MMS messages.If the MMS message file size is exceeded, the message won't besent.General §Search and display the sent message history, call history, and emailaddresses of stored contacts when you’re adding messagerecipients.§Set the number of lines of text to preview for each message on theAll messages screen.§Choose the maximum number of text or MMS messages to store ineach conversation thread (excluding locked messages), and enableautomatic deletion of unlocked older messages when set limits arereached.§Forward received text and MMS messages to another phonenumber or email address. (This may incur extra fees.)§Add a signature to your messages.111 MessagesHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
EmailGmailUsing GmailWhen you first set up HTC Explorer, make sure you sign into your Google Account touse Gmail. If you didn’t do so, go to the Accounts & sync setting to sign in.You can also set up more than one Google Account on HTC Explorer, and then switchbetween accounts in Gmail.Viewing your Gmail InboxAll your received emails are delivered to your Inbox.From the Home screen, tap > Gmail. Your Gmail inbox then opens.Archive, delete orlabel multipleconversationsTap before the email orconversation. Then tap theonscreen buttons at the bottomto choose what to do with theselected messages orconversations.Display drafts, sentmessages, andother labelsTap Inbox at the top left of thescreen, and then tap another label(such as Sent, Drafts, or yourcreated label) to view itsmessages and conversations.Switch to yourother GmailaccountTap the current account at thetop right of the screen, and thentap another account you want toswitch to.Refresh the Inbox Press , and then tap Refresh.Sending a new message1. In the Gmail inbox, press and then tap Compose.2. If you’ve set up multiple Google Accounts on HTC Explorer, choose which Gmailaddress you want to use for sending your email. Tap the box that shows yourcurrent Gmail address, and then tap another address that you want to use forsending.112 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Enter the message recipient’s email address in the To field. If you are sendingthe email to several recipients, separate the email addresses with a comma.If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the email toother recipients, press and then tap Add Cc/Bcc.4. Enter the email subject, and then compose your email.5. If you want to attach a picture, press and then tap Attach.6. Locate and then tap the picture you want to attach.7. After composing your message, tap . While composing the message, tap to save it as a draft. Or press to discardthe message.Replying to or forwarding an email message1. In the Gmail inbox, tap the email message or conversation.2. To reply to the sender, tap . Or, tap and choose whether to Reply all orForward.3. Do one of the following:§If you selected Reply or Reply all, enter your reply message.§If you selected Forward, specify the message recipients.Tap Respond inline if you want to interleave your new message with the receivedemail. But this removes any attachments or formatting in the original email.4. Tap .Getting helpTo find out more about using Gmail, press , and then tap More > Help. The webbrowser will take you to the Google Mobile Help site.MailAbout the Mail appUse the Mail app to add your webmail and other POP3 or IMAP email accounts. Youcan also set up and use your Exchange ActiveSync email on HTC Explorer.You can add the Mail widget to view your POP3/IMAP or Exchange ActiveSyncemails on the Home screen.113 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Adding a POP3/IMAP email account1. From the Home screen, tap > Mail.2. Do one of the following:§If this is your first time to add an email account in Mail, tap Other (POP3/IMAP) on the Choose a mail provider screen.§If you’ve already added an email account in Mail, press , and then tapMore > New account. If the Choose a mail provider screen is displayed, tapOther (POP3/IMAP).3. Enter the email address and password for your email account and then tapNext.4. If the account type you want to set up is not in the internal database, you’ll beasked to enter more details.5. Enter the account name and your name and then tap Finish setup.Adding a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accountYou can add one or more Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync accounts on HTC Explorer.You can sync with Microsoft Exchange Server 2003 Service Pack (SP2) or later.You can add up to 15 Exchange ActiveSync accounts on HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, tap > Mail.2. Do one of the following:§If this is your first time to add an email account in Mail, tap MicrosoftExchange ActiveSync on the Choose a mail provider screen.§If you’ve already added an email account in Mail, press , and then tapMore > New account. If the Choose a mail provider screen is displayed, tapMicrosoft Exchange ActiveSync.3. Enter the Exchange ActiveSync account details, and then tap Next. If yourcorporate Exchange Server does not support auto-detect, you’ll need to enteryour Exchange Server settings after you tap Next. Ask your Exchange Serveradministrator for details.4. Choose the types of information you want to sync. Also choose how often youwant to update and sync email to HTC Explorer, then tap Next.5. Enter the account name, then tap Finish setup.114 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Checking your Mail inboxWhen you open the Mail app, it displays the inbox of one of your email accounts thatyou’ve set up on HTC Explorer.To switch between email accounts, tap the bar that shows the current email account,and then tap another account.Viewing the unified inbox of all your email accountsYou can view email messages from all your accounts just in one place without havingto switch to different accounts.Just tap the bar that shows the current email account, and then tap All accounts.Email messages are color coded so you can easily distinguish which email accountsthey belong to.Up to 15 email accounts can be shown in the unified inbox.Switching between different views of your inboxIf you have lots of email messages, it may take you some time to browse through thelong list and find a single email or related email messages. Use the tabs of the Mail appto sort your emails into different categories.To skim through your email messages easier, tap one of the following tabs to changethe view of your inbox:InboxDisplays email messages as individual items.ThreadDisplays email messages as conversations, grouped according to the subjectline. Tap a subject in the list to show the email conversation.115 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
GroupDisplays all email messages from a contact group. To choose which contactgroup to display, press , tap View, and then select a group.UnreadDisplays unread messages.Marked (Exchange ActiveSync only)Displays all flagged messages.Invites or Meeting invitations (Exchange ActiveSync only)Displays meeting invitations which you have not yet accepted or declined.AttachmentsDisplays all messages that have attachments.Can't see the tab that you want? Press and hold a tab and wait for the screen toshow the other tabs. You can tap and hold a tab, and then drag it to where youwant it.Refreshing an email accountWhatever your automatic synchronization settings are, you can also synchronize yoursent and received emails manually at any time.§While in the account you want to synchronize, press , and then tap Refresh.§If you have several email accounts, you can refresh them all at the same time.Go to the All accounts inbox first. Then press and tap Refresh.Sorting email messagesYou can sort email messages by date received, priority, subject, sender, or size.On the inbox, press , tap Sort, and select from the sorting options.Quickly browsing your inboxIf you have a long list of email messages in your inbox, it may not be easy to browsethe list and find an email that you want. You can quickly browse through your inboxby using finger gestures.1. Choose a sorting order for displaying your email messages.2. Press and hold two fingers on any email message, and then drag upward ordownward without lifting your fingers. Your screen then jumps to the set ofemail messages based on your chosen sorting order.116 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Managing email messagesDeleting an email message1. On the inbox, press and hold the message you want to delete.2. On the options menu, tap Delete.Selecting several email messages1. Tap the check boxes of email messages to select them.2. Choose what you want to do with the selected messages: Mark read (or markMark unread), Delete, or Move to another folder.You cannot move email messages when you’re in the unified (All accounts) inbox.Moving several email messages to another folder1. Switch to the email account you want to use.2. Tap the check boxes of email messages you want to move.3. Tap Move to, and then tap the folder where to move the email messages.Moving an email message after reading1. While viewing the email, tap Move to.2. Tap the folder where you want to move the email message.Deleting all messages1. First tap the check box of any email message.2. Press , and then tap Select all.3. Tap Delete.Switching to other mail folders1. Press , and then tap Folders.2. Tap the mail folder whose messages you want to view.Sending an email message1. From the Home screen, tap > Mail.2. Switch to the email account that you want to use for sending email.3. On the email account inbox, tap .117 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Fill in one or more recipients. You can:§Enter email addresses directly in the To field, separating them with acomma. As you enter email addresses, any matching addresses from yourcontacts list are displayed. Tap a match to enter that address directly.§Tap the icon, and then choose the contacts to whom you want to sendthe message. You can also select contact groups as recipients, or searchand add contacts.If the contact name you entered is not found and you have an ExchangeActiveSync account in the Mail app, you can search for the contact in yourcompany directory.If you want to send a carbon copy (Cc) or a blind carbon copy (Bcc) of the email toother recipients, press , and then tap Show Cc/Bcc.5. Enter the subject, and then compose your message.6. To add an attachment, press , tap Attach, and choose from the followingoptions:Picture Take a photo and attach it, or attach an existing photo.Video Record a video and attach it, or attach an existingvideo.Audio Attach an audio file.App recommendation Choose an app you’ve installed from Android Marketthat you want to tell other people about. The URL fromwhich the app can be downloaded will be inserted inyour email.Location You can attach location information. Send your currentlocation (requires GPS to be turned on) or a locationyou pick on a map.Document Attach a PDF file or an Office document such as a textfile or a spreadsheet.Contact (vCard) Attach someone’s contact information.Appointment(vCalendar)Attach a calendar event.File Attach any other file.7. Tap Send to send the message immediately, or tap Save as draft to send it later.If there’s no Internet connection available or Airplane mode is on when you sendyour email, the email will be saved to the Outbox folder. Once there’s Internetconnection available, the saved email will be sent automatically next timeHTC Explorer syncs.118 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Resuming a draft email message1. In the email account inbox, press , and then tap Folders > Drafts.2. Tap the message.3. When you finish editing the message, tap Send.Managing the recipient listFilled up the To field but want to make changes in it? You can manage the recipientlist and change who appears in the To, Cc, and Bcc fields.You must have entered contacts in the To, Cc, or Bcc field.1. In the To, Cc, or Bcc field, tap the Edit button. The names of the contacts arelisted.2. Tap the checkbox beside the contact that you want to move to another field.3. Tap the action that apply.4. When you are done with the changes, press to go back to composing youremail.Reading and replying to an email message1. From the Home screen, tap > Mail.2. Switch to the email account you want to use.3. On the email account inbox, tap the email you want to read.4. Choose an action on the bottom of the screen for your email. Press to see options for deleting your email or marking it as unread.Where are my unread emails?The Unread tab contains all your unread emails. Add it if it does not appear onyour screen.1. Press and hold a tab. When the screen changes and shows you the areawhere you can rearrange icons, lift your finger.2. Press and hold the Unread tab, and then drag it to its new position.3. Press , and then tap the Unread tab.119 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting the priority for an email messageYou can set the priority for an email message that you send.1. While composing the message, press .2. Tap Set priority.3. Select the priority for the message.If you selected High or Low priority, the priority appears below the subject line of themessage.Searching and filtering emailsSearch emails in all your email accounts or in a specific one. You can even refine yoursearch by indicating which part of the email will be searched.1. Press .2. If you want to refine or filter your search, tap and then check the optionsthat apply. For example, you can focus the search on a part of an email or filteremails that have attachments or tagged as high priority.3. Tap OK.4. Enter the first few characters of the item you're looking for in the search box.Results will then be listed.Tap a result to open the email.Searching emails from a contactDo you remember the sender, but can't find a particular email from this contact? Youcan search your mail accounts for emails from a specific contact.1. Switch to the email account you want to use.2. Press and hold an email from a contact.3. Tap Search the mail from the sender. A list of emails from that contact appears.Working with Exchange ActiveSync emailYou can read, reply, send, and manage your work email in the same easy way as witha POP3/IMAP account. In addition, you can also use some powerful Exchangefeatures.Flagging an email§While viewing the inbox, tap the white flag icon that appears on the right ofan email message. The icon turns red after you flagged the email.§While reading an email, you can also tap the flag icon in the email.120 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting your Out of the office status1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.2. Press and then tap More > Out of the office.3. Tap the box, and then select Out of the office.4. Set the dates and times for the period when you will be out of the office.5. Enter the auto-reply message. You can also send auto-reply messages to external recipients, which are contactswhose addresses are not in the same Microsoft Exchange server.6. Tap Save.Sending a meeting request1. Switch to your Exchange ActiveSync account.2. Go to the Invitations tab, and then tap .3. Enter the meeting details.4. Tap Save.Changing email account settings1. Switch to the email account whose settings you want to change.2. Press , and then tap More > Settings.3. Select from the following:Account settings Change the email account settings such as the name,email address, password, and description.General settings Set the font size when reading emails, enable, disable orset the signature, set the account as the default emailaccount, and set where to save email attachments.Send & Receive Set the sync settings for incoming and outgoing emailssuch as maximum size limit, update schedule, and more.NotificationsettingsSet email notification settings.Delete account Tap to delete the email account.4. Press to save your changes.Deleting an email account1. Switch to the email account you want to delete.2. Press , and then tap More > Settings > Delete account.121 EmailHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
CalendarAbout CalendarNever miss an important date again. Use the Calendar app to schedule your events,meetings, and appointments.You can set up HTC Explorer to stay in sync with the following types of calendars:§On HTC Explorer, sign in to your Google Account so you can sync the Calendarapp with your Google Calendar online. You can add multiple Google Accounts.§If you're using Microsoft Outlook on your computer, you can set up HTC Syncon your computer to sync Outlook Calendar with the Calendar app.§If you have a Microsoft Exchange ActiveSync account and you've added it onHTC Explorer, you can sync the Calendar app with your Exchange ActiveSynccalendar events.If you've signed in to Facebook, birthdays and events of friends will appear inCalendar.Creating an eventYou can create events that sync with your Google or Exchange ActiveSync calendars,as well as events on HTC Explorer.Not signed in yet on your accounts? Your calendar events will be created under PCSync, which you can later sync with your computer's Outlook Calendar throughHTC Sync.1. From the Home screen, tap > Calendar.2. On any Calendar view, tap .3. If you have more than one calendar, select a calendar in which to add the event.4. If you want to invite people to your event, tap and choose attendees fromyour contacts or company directory.5. Enter a name for the event.6. To specify the date and time of the event, do one of the following:§If there is a time frame for the event, tap the From and To date and time toset them.§If it is a whole-day event, such as a birthday, set the From and To date, thenselect the All day check box.7. Enter the event location and description.122 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
8. Set the reminder time. You can add another reminder time in a Google Calendar event. Press and thentap Add reminder.9. If the event occurs on a regular basis, tap the Repetition box and then choosehow often the event occurs.10. Tap Save.Changing Calendar viewsEasily switch between different calendar views by tapping the onscreen buttons.Day viewWeek viewMonth viewAgenda viewMeeting invitations§In Day, Week, and Agenda views, events are color coded to indicate whichaccount or type of calendar they belong to. To find out what each colorrepresents, tap .§Can't see the tab that you want? Press and hold a tab and wait for the screen toshow the other tabs. You can press and hold a tab, and then drag it to where youwant it.Using month viewIn month view, you will see markers on days that have events.Do any of the following in month view:§Tap a day to view the events for that day.§Press and hold a day to open an options menu from which you can also chooseto create an event or switch to either day or agenda view.§Slide your finger up or down the screen to view earlier or later months.123 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using day and agenda viewsDay view shows your events per day, whereas agenda view displays all your events inchronological order.When in day view:§Press and hold on a time slot to create a new event at that time.§Slide left or right across the screen to view earlier or later days.§You can also see the day's weather, but only if it's within the five-day forecast.Using week viewWeek view displays a chart of the events of one week.When in week view, you can:§Press and hold on a time slot to create a new event at that time.§Tap an event (shown as colored blocks) to view its details.§Slide left or right across the screen to view earlier or later weeks.Managing Calendar eventsViewing an eventYou can view your own events as well as events that other people have shared withyou.1. In day view or agenda view, tap an event. The Event details screen then opensand shows the summary of the event.2. Depending on the event information, do any of the following:§Find the event’s location in Maps.§Call any phone number included in the event location or description.§Check the participants of the event.§If the event was sent as a meeting invitation, respond to the invitation.§If it’s an Exchange ActiveSync calendar event, reply by email to theorganizer or to all the guests. Press , and then tap Reply or Reply all (orMore > Reply or Reply all).§Select any text and look it up on the Web.§Tap the reminder time to change it. Press to save changes.You can return to the current date by tapping .124 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Editing an eventYou can edit events that you have created.1. While viewing an event, tap .2. Make your changes to the event.3. When you’re done editing, tap Save.Deleting an eventDo any of the following:§While viewing the summary of an event on the Event details screen, press andthen tap Delete event.§In day, agenda or week view, press and hold an event and then tap Delete event.§When editing an event, tap Delete.If the event repeats, you’ll be asked whether you want to delete just that occurrenceor all occurrences from Calendar.Sharing an event (vCalendar)You can share a calendar event as a vCalendar using Bluetooth or by sending it as afile attachment with your email or message.1. While viewing an event, press , and then tap Forward.2. Do one of the following:§Tap Bluetooth. You’ll be asked to turn on Bluetooth on HTC Explorer andconnect to the receiving Bluetooth device.§Tap Mail. A new message window opens and automatically includes thevCalendar as an attachment. Your default email account will be used tosend the message.§Tap Message. A new message window opens and automatically includesthe vCalendar as a multimedia attachment.Accepting or declining a meeting invitation1. If you're using an Exchange ActiveSync account on HTC Explorer, tap theInvites tab in Calendar to see meeting invitations which you have not yetaccepted or declined.2. Tap a meeting invitation, and then do one of the following:§Accept, decline, or tentatively accept the invitation or propose a new time.§Press to see options for replying, moving the invitation to a folder, andmore.125 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Dismissing or snoozing event remindersIf you have set at least one reminder for an event, the upcoming event icon willappear in the notifications area of the status bar to remind you of the upcomingevent.1. Tap the status bar, then slide your finger down the screen to open theNotifications panel.2. Do one of the following:§Tap Clear to dismiss event reminders and all other notifications.§After sliding open the Notifications panel, tap the calendar event reminder.You’ll then see a list of all pending event reminders. Tap Snooze all tosnooze all event reminders for five minutes, or tap Dismiss all to dismiss allevent reminders.§Press to keep the reminders pending in the notifications area of thestatus bar.Showing or hiding calendarsIn any Calendar view, tap , and then select or clear a calendar to show or hide it. Calendars are kept synchronized on HTC Explorer, whether or not you hide them.Changing Calendar settingsYou can change Calendar settings to specify how it displays events and how it notifiesyou of upcoming events.In any Calendar view, press and then tap Settings (or More > Settings).Reminder settingsAll calendars Select this check box to use the same event reminder settingsfor all types of calendars. If you clear this check box, you canset different reminder settings for each calendar.Set alerts &notificationsConfigure event reminders to open an alert, send you anotification, or turn off event notifications on HTC Explorer.Default remindertimeChoose how soon before an event you want to be notified.Select ringtone Choose a ringtone to sound when you receive an eventreminder.Hide declined events Choose whether to show or hide events for which you'vedeclined invitations.126 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Calendar view settingsFirst day ofweekSet the month and week views to start on a Sunday or Monday.Include weather Select this check box to show weather information in the day viewevents list.City If weather is included, by default, day view displays your currentlocation's weather. You can change it to display the weather ofanother city.About the Calendar widgetYou can add a Calendar widget to your Home screen. The widgets offer differentcalendar views.Tapping a day or event on the widget brings you to the Calendar app.127 CalendarHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Maps and locationLocation settingsTurning on location servicesIn order to find your location on HTC Explorer, you need to enable location sources.1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Settings > Location.2. Select one or both of the following:Use wirelessnetworksUses Wi-Fi or your mobile data connection to find yourapproximate location.Use GPS satellites Finds your exact GPS location. This requires a clear viewof the sky and more battery power.Google MapsAbout Google MapsGoogle Maps™ lets you track your current location, view real-time traffic situations,and receive detailed directions to your destination.It also provides a search tool where you can locate places of interest or an address ona map, or view locations at street level.§You need to connect to the Internet to use Google Maps.§To find your location with Google Maps, you need to enable location sources.§The Google Maps app does not cover every country or city.128 Maps and locationHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Getting around mapsWhen you open Google Maps, you can easily find your location on the map or checkout nearby places by panning and zooming in and out on the map.To find your location with Google Maps, you need to enable location sources.1. From the Home screen, tap > Maps.2. Tap to show your current location. The blue marker shows your currentlocation on the map.3. Do any of the following:Move around Swipe your finger to any direction on the screen to viewnearby places on the map.Use CompassmodeTap to switch to Compass mode. In Compass mode, themap changes to an angled view and automatically orientsitself depending on the direction you're facing.Zoom in §Place your thumb and index fingers on top of the area thatyou want to zoom in, and then spread your fingers acrossthe map.§Tap .§Double-tap the area on the map that you want to zoom in.Zoom out §Pinch your thumb and index finger on the map to zoomout.§Tap .Viewinformation for arandom location1. Press and hold a location on the map. A balloon opens overthe location, with the address and a thumbnail from streetview (if available).2. Tap the balloon to see more information.You can get directions to the location, check for nearbyplaces of interest, and more.129 Maps and locationHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Searching for a locationIn Google Maps, you can search for a location, such as an address or a type ofbusiness or establishment (for example, museums).1. In Maps, enter the place you want to search for in the search box.2. Tap to search for the location you entered or tap a suggested search item.The search results are displayed as markers on the map.3. Do any of the following:§Tap a marker to see if that is what you’re looking for, tap the balloon if itis.§Tap to show the search results as a list, and then tap the location.Details about the selected location displays on the screen.4. Do any of the following:§Tap the onscreen buttons to view the location on a map, get directions,view the location in Street View, if available, and more. Scroll down thescreen to view more options.§Swipe left or right across the screen to view the information for the next orprevious search result.Clearing the mapAfter searching on a map, you can clear away the various markers drawn on it.Press , and then tap Clear Map.Searching for a place of interest near youUse Places to find places of interest near your current location. Places uses GoogleMaps to search common places that you would want to find, such as the nearest gasstation or ATM kiosk.Before using Places, you need to enable location sources.1. From the Home screen, tap > Places.2. Tap the type of place you want to search.3. Do any of the following:§When one or two places of interest are found, the search results aredisplayed as markers on the map. You can tap the marker, and then tap theballoon to view more information about the place.§When several places are found, the search results display in a list. Tap aplace to view more information.130 Maps and locationHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Getting directionsGet detailed directions to your destination. Google Maps can provide directions fortravel by foot, public transportation, or car.1. While viewing a map, press , and then tap Directions.2. Do any of the following:§Use your current location as the starting point, or enter a location fromwhere to start in the first text box. Then enter your destination in thesecond text box.§Tap to select an address from your contacts or a point that you tap on amap.3. Choose how you want to get to your destination by tapping the car, publictransit, bike, or walk button.4. Tap Get directions. The next screen displays the directions to your destination ina list.If the place you’ve set as your destination has several locations available, choosewhich one to go to.5. Tap an item to view the directions on the map.6. Tap the arrow buttons on the map to follow the directions.When you’re finished viewing or following the directions, press and then tap ClearMap to reset the map. Your destination is automatically saved in the Google Mapshistory.131 Maps and locationHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Getting helpGet help and more information about Maps.To open the help, press , and then tap More > Help. The web browser opens andtakes you to the Google Maps Help site.Finding your friends with Google Latitude (available by country)Google Latitude® user location service lets you and your friends share locations andstatus messages with each other. It also lets you get directions to your friends’locations, send your location details by email, and more.Your location is not shared automatically. You must join Latitude, and then invite yourfriends to view your location or accept their invitations. Only friends that you haveexplicitly invited or accepted can see your location.Opening and joining Latitude1. From the Home screen, tap > Maps.2. While viewing a map, press and then tap Join Latitude.3. After you’ve joined Latitude and closed the application, you can do any of thefollowing to open it from the Home screen:§Tap > Latitude.§Open Maps, press , and then tap Latitude.132 Maps and locationHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
HTC SyncAbout HTC SyncYou have your new vacation photos on HTC Explorer while your business calendar ison your computer. Why not make your files and information available on bothdevices?With HTC Sync, you can:§Sync your contacts between your Microsoft Outlook, Outlook Express orWindows Contacts on your computer and HTC Explorer.§Sync your calendar events between the Outlook or Windows Calendar on yourcomputer and HTC Explorer.§Bring your photos, videos, documents, songs, and playlists to HTC Explorer andenjoy them on the go.§Easily import your captured photos and videos from HTC Explorer to yourcomputer.§Store the same web bookmarks on both your computer and HTC Explorer.§Install third-party mobile apps from your computer.You need a storage card inserted into HTC Explorer to be able to sync multimediafiles and documents.Installing HTC Sync§HTC Sync requires USB 2.0 on your computer to connect and sync withHTC Explorer.§For trouble-free installation, first quit all running programs and temporarily exitfrom your anti-virus program before you start installing HTC Sync.Do either of the following:§Check and copy the HTC Sync installer from the storage card (if available), andthen install it on your computer.§Download the HTC Sync software for HTC Explorer from our support website(www.htc.com/support/) and install it on your computer.133 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting up HTC Sync to recognizeHTC Explorer1. Connect HTC Explorer to your computer using the USB cable that came in thebox.2. When HTC Explorer prompts you to choose a type of USB connection, tap HTCSync, and then tap Done. Wait for HTC Sync to recognize HTC Explorer.3. On the Device setup screen, enter a name for HTC Explorer.4. Click Save. The Device panel then opens.To change the name of HTC Explorer later, click Overview > Device setup.Getting to know the workspaceOn the Device panel, you can set your sync options, see general information aboutHTC Explorer, check the used and available storage space, and begin synchronization.The available categories and options depend on the device you've connected toyour computer.§You can click a category of items to see its sync options on the right side of theDevice panel.Clicking Overview displays basic software information and storage usage, andlets you change the name of HTC Explorer, or install third-party applications toHTC Explorer.§The Sync now button lets you start syncing the categories and options you'veselected.§The estimated storage usage bar beside the Sync now button shows you theestimated storage space that will be used when there are new items to besynchronized and added to HTC Explorer.134 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting up synchronizationYou can choose the types of files and information you want to sync betweenHTC Explorer and your computer.Music sync optionsBring the music tracks and songs you play on your computer to HTC Explorer. If youhave playlists created in iTunes® or Windows Media® Player, you can sync these tooand enjoy them on the go.You can sync audio files in these formats: *.aac, *.amr, *.m4a, *.mid, *.midi, *.mp3,*.wav, *.wma1. On the Device panel, click Music, and then click the On button. Turning Musicsync on means you want this category included every time you sync yourcomputer and HTC Explorer.2. Select Sync music files from, and then click Add.3. Choose a folder that contains your audio files, and then click OK.4. Select Sync music files from iTunes and Windows Media Player if you're usingeither of these software on your computer, and then choose the playlists youwant to sync on HTC Explorer.Gallery sync optionsYou can automatically sync photos and videos between HTC Explorer and acomputer.You can sync photos and videos in these formats:§Photos: *.bmp, *.gif, *.jpeg, *.jpg, *.png§Videos: *.3gp, *.3g2, *.mp4, *.wmv1. On the Device panel, click Gallery, and then click the On button. Turning Gallerysync on means you want this category included every time you sync yourcomputer and HTC Explorer.2. To automatically import your camera shots to your computer duringsynchronization, select Copy device Camera Shots to PC. Photos and videosfrom HTC Explorer will be saved to the \My Photos\Device Camera Shotsfolder on your computer.3. Select Sync PC photos & videos from, and then click Add.4. Choose a folder that contains your multimedia files, and then click OK. Allsupported image and video files added to this folder will be copied toHTC Explorer during synchronization.135 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Calendar sync optionsHTC Explorer can sync appointments and events with your calendar in Outlook(Outlook XP, Outlook 2003 or Outlook 2007) or Windows Calendar.1. On the Device panel, click Calendar, and then click the On button. TurningCalendar sync on means you want this category included every time you syncyour computer and HTC Explorer.2. Select the application you want to sync calendar events with.3. Choose from which point you want to start synchronizing your calendar events.4. In cases when conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and thecomputer, choose which information you want to keep.Only the calendar fields supported on HTC Explorer will be synchronized.People sync optionsSync HTC Explorer contacts with your Outlook (Outlook XP, Outlook 2003 or Outlook2007), Outlook Express, or Windows Contacts.If you have contacts to sync from your SIM card, you have to import these first toHTC Explorer storage.1. On the Device panel, click People, and then click the On button. Turning Peoplesync on means you want this category included every time you sync yourcomputer and HTC Explorer.2. Choose the application you want to sync your contacts with.3. In cases when conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and thecomputer, choose which information you want to keep.Only the contact fields supported on HTC Explorer will be synchronized.136 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Bookmarks sync optionsSync web browser bookmarks between HTC Explorer and a computer.If you are using Google Chrome™ or Firefox® Internet browser and have selected itto sync with HTC Explorer, make sure to close all browser windows before youbegin synchronization.1. Using your favorite web browser on your computer, create a favorites foldernamed HTC bookmarks. Make sure to save your favorite bookmarks in thisfolder to be able to sync them with HTC Explorer.2. On HTC Sync's Device panel, click Bookmarks, and then click the On button.Turning Bookmarks sync on means you want this category included every timeyou sync your computer and HTC Explorer.3. Choose the web browser that stores the bookmarks to sync with HTC Explorer.When conflicting information is found on both HTC Explorer and computer, HTCSync keeps the information from your computer.Documents sync optionsYou can sync files and documents from your computer to HTC Explorer. You can alsosync email attachments that you stored on HTC Explorer to your computer.§To open a document on HTC Explorer, you'll need a compatible app.§To sync email attachments stored on HTC Explorer to your computer, you mustset up an Exchange ActiveSync or POP3/IMAP email account from the Mail app onHTC Explorer.1. On the Device panel, click Documents, and then click the On button. TurningDocuments sync on means you want this category included every time you syncyour computer and HTC Explorer.2. To sync email attachments that you've stored on HTC Explorer, select Copy alldownload Mail documents to PC. 3. Select Sync PC documents from, and then click Add.4. Choose a folder that contains the documents you want to sync onHTC Explorer, and then click OK.Email attachments will be saved on the \My Documents\ folder.137 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Synchronizing HTC ExplorerCheck the estimated usage bar beside the Sync now button for the estimated file sizeof new items to sync on HTC Explorer.1. After selecting and customizing the categories you want to sync, click Syncnow.2. After synchronization is complete, click Disconnect.3. Safely remove HTC Explorer as required by your computer's operating system.The next time you connect HTC Explorer to your computer, synchronizationautomatically begins based on your sync settings.Installing an app from your computer toHTC ExplorerIf you have application files (*.apk) on your computer, you can use HTC Sync toinstall them to HTC Explorer. We strongly recommend you install only applicationsthat you trust.Before you begin, make sure that HTC Explorer is set to allow applications fromyour computer to be installed toHTC Explorer. To do this, press while on theHome screen, tap Settings > Applications, and then select the Unknown sourcescheck box.1. On the Device panel, click Overview.2. Click Application installer.3. Browse for the application file on your computer, and then click Open. Theinstallation process starts on HTC Explorer.4. Check the screen on HTC Explorer to see if there are additional instructions tocomplete the installation.5. After installation is complete, you can click Disconnect.6. Safely remove HTC Explorer as required by your computer's operating system.138 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Synchronizing another device with yourcomputerYou can switch from one device to another, if you have more than one device to sync.1. Connect another device to your computer, then set up HTC Sync to recognizeit.2. Click the device you want to set up or begin synchronization. The Device panelthen opens, where you can separately customize your sync settings for thisdevice.To switch to another device to sync, click Devices, and then click the device's name orimage.Downloading the latest HTC Sync upgradeVisit the HTC support website (www.htc.com/support/) from time to time to checkfor the most recent HTC Sync upgrade so you can download and install it on yourcomputer.After installing the latest upgrade, set up HTC Sync again to recognize and sync withHTC Explorer.139 HTC SyncHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
HTCSense.comSigning up for your HTCSense.com accountYou can sign up for your HTCSense.com account on HTC Explorer or your computer’sweb browser.Signing up from HTC Explorer1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Accounts & sync.2. Tap Add account > HTC Sense.3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign up for your HTCSense.com account.Signing up from your computerMake sure you have HTC Explorer close by. You’ll need it to complete the sign-upprocess.1. On your computer, open your web browser.2. Go to www.htcsense.com.3. Follow the onscreen instructions to sign up for your HTCSense.com account.After signing up to HTCSense.com on the Web, you have to sign in using the sameaccount credentials on HTC Explorer.Updating your HTCSense.com account details1. On your computer, open your web browser and sign in to your HTCSense.comaccount.2. On the upper-right corner, click Account.3. Update your account details, and then click Save Changes.Turning on Device finderSome features of HTCSense.com require that the Device finder option onHTC Explorer is selected.1. On HTC Explorer, from the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Location.3. Select the Device finder check box.140 HTCSense.comHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using HTCSense.comForgot HTC Explorer at home or you can’t find it? Or worse, it slipped out of yourpocket while riding the train. Use HTCSense.com to communicate with HTC Explorerso you can forward calls and messages to a different number, make HTC Explorerring, lock it, and even erase its contents.To use these features, you'll need to sign in to HTCSense.com on a computer webbrowser.Making HTC Explorer ringYou know HTC Explorer is somewhere in your home but you just can’t find it. MakeHTC Explorer ring, even if it’s on mute, so that you can find it. Hopefully, it’s justburied under some clothes in the hamper.On HTCSense.com, click Ring.Forwarding calls and messagesYou can forward calls and messages to another phone if you don’t have HTC Explorerwith you.Before turning on Forward calls or Forward messages, you need to customizesettings first such as specifying an alternate phone number or email address.§To forward calls, click the Forward calls On/Off switch. (Be sure that Enable callforwarding is selected in Settings.)§To forward messages, click the Forward messages On/Off switch. (You shouldselect Forward messages to device or Forward messages to an email address inSettings.)Locating HTC ExplorerLeft HTC Explorer somewhere while doing your errands? You can use HTCSense.comto find its approximate location.You must have the Phone finder option selected in Settings > Location onHTC Explorer for this feature to work.On HTCSense.com, check the map to see where HTC Explorer is. Click Refreshlocation to refresh the map.141 HTCSense.comHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Locking HTC ExplorerLost HTC Explorer? Lock HTC Explorer and show a message onscreen so if somebodyfinds it, they can contact you.1. On HTCSense.com, click Lock device.2. Enter a PIN, an alternate phone number to call if somebody finds HTC Explorer,and a short message to show onscreen. The alternate number is shown on the screen. If somebody happens to findHTC Explorer, that person can simply tap it to call that number using HTC Explorer.3. Click Save.Erasing the contents of HTC ExplorerIf there’s no chance of getting HTC Explorer back, you can erase the contents ofHTC Explorer and the installed storage card so no one sees sensitive information onHTC Explorer.There’s no way to recover HTC Explorer and storage card data after you erase thecontents so be absolutely sure before you proceed.1. On HTCSense.com, click Erase device.2. When asked to confirm, click Erase device.Deleting your HTCSense.com account1. On your computer, open your web browser and sign in to your HTCSense.comaccount.2. On the upper-right corner, click Account.3. Click Click here to delete your HTCSense account.Deleting your HTCSense.com account will also delete your data on HTCSense.comservers.142 HTCSense.comHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
KeyboardUsing the onscreen keyboardWhen you start an app or select a field that requires text or numbers, the onscreenkeyboard becomes available. After entering your text, you can tap or press toclose the onscreen keyboard.Selecting a keyboard layoutYou can choose from three different keyboard layouts to suit your typing style.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Keyboard types, and then select the keyboard layout that you want to use.Standard This layout is similar to a desktop computer keyboard. This is thedefault keyboard layout.Phone This layout resembles the traditional mobile phone keypad.Compact This layout features two letters on each key. The key size is slightlybigger than on the Standard layout.Entering textUse the following keys while entering text using the onscreen keyboard:Press and hold keys with gray characters at the top to enter numbers, symbols,or accented letters. The gray character displayed on the key is the character thatwill be inserted when you press and hold that key. Some keys have multiplecharacters or accents associated with them.Shift key. Tap to enter an uppercase letter. Tap twice to turn on caps lock.Tap to switch to the numeric and symbol keyboard.Enter key. Tap to create a new line.Backspace key. Tap to delete the previous character.Language key. The key you see depends on the keyboard language you arecurrently using. Tap to switch to another keyboard language. You can alsoaccess onscreen keyboard settings.143 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Tap to toggle between Multitap and XT9 predictive modes when using theCompact or Phone keyboard layout.Tap to hide the onscreen keyboard.Enabling multiple keyboard languagesIf there are multiple keyboard languages available on HTC Explorer, you can choosewhich languages to enable in the onscreen keyboard so that you can switch to theselanguages and use them to enter text.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap International keyboard.3. Choose the languages you want. Available languages depend on the region where you purchased HTC Explorer.Changing to the landscape onscreen keyboardWhen entering text, you can choose to use the landscape orientation of the onscreenkeyboard. Turn HTC Explorer sideways to use a larger keyboard for easy typing.§Select the Auto-rotate screen check box in > > Settings > Display to allowthe screen orientation to automatically change.§The landscape orientation keyboard is not supported in all apps.Entering words with predictive textThe onscreen keyboard has predictive text to help you type quickly and accurately.Predictive text input is enabled by default, and word suggestions are displayed as youtype.To enter a word in predictive mode, do any of the following:§If you see the word you want highlighted in green or orange, just tap the spacebar to insert the word into your text.§If you see the word you want shown in the suggestions before you have finishedtyping the entire word, tap the word to insert it into your text.§If an arrow is shown to the right of the suggestion list, tap the arrow to see moresuggestions.144 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting a second language for the keyboardAside from the keyboard language you are currently using, you can set the predictivetext to be bilingual. As you type, you’ll get word suggestions in two languages thatyou’ve selected.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Bilingual prediction, and then choose the language you want.Adding a word to the predictive text dictionaryHTC Explorer comes with a list of words that it references for predictive textsuggestions. While entering text using the Standard keyboard layout, if you tap anyword on the suggestion list, it is automatically added to the predictive text dictionaryif it was not in the dictionary already.You can also add a word to the list manually.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Personal dictionary > Edit personal dictionary > .3. Enter the word to add, and then tap OK.Editing or deleting a word in the predictive text dictionaryYou can edit or remove words that you previously added to the predictive textdictionary.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Personal dictionary > Edit personal dictionary.§To edit a word, tap the word itself.§To delete words from the dictionary, press and tap Delete. Then choosethe words to remove and tap Delete.Backing up your personal dictionary to your storage cardIf you have a storage card installed, you can back up the new words you’ve added tothe predictive text dictionary.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary > Copy to storage card.3. When prompted, tap OK.145 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Importing your personal dictionary from your storage card1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.2. Tap Personal dictionary > Sync personal dictionary > Restore from storagecard.3. When prompted, tap OK.Entering text by speakingNo time to type? Try speaking the words to enter them in most text fields that let youuse the onscreen keyboard.§First make sure to select the language you’ll be using in the Voice input & outputsettings.§Since HTC Explorer uses Google’s speech-recognition service, you need to beconnected to the Internet to enter text by speaking.1. Press and hold the language key. HTC Explorer cues you to speak.2. Tell HTC Explorer what you want to be typed in.Setting the voice input language1. From the Home screen, press , then tap Settings > Voice input & output >Voice recognizer settings.2. Tap Language, then choose the language you want. Available languages depend on the voice input languages supported by Google.146 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Entering text by tracingInstead of tapping the keys on the onscreen keyboard, you can "trace" to type words.Trace keyboard in Settings > Language & keyboard > Touch Input > Tracekeyboard must be selected for you to use the Trace keyboard.To trace, slide your finger on the onscreen keyboard to enter words. For example, ifyou want to type “the”, put your finger on the “t” key, and then trace the word (bysliding your finger) “the” on the onscreen keyboard.Editing textIt's easy to cut, copy, and paste text using the keyboard.Some apps may offer their own way of selecting or copying text.Selecting textHighlight the text that you want to copy or cut.1. Press and hold the text field that contains the text to select until the magnifierappears. 2. Drag your finger to move the text cursor to a letter within the text that youwant to select.147 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. After positioning the text cursor, lift your finger. The text selection menu thenpops up.4. Do one of the following:§Tap Select word. When the word where you’ve placed the text cursor ishighlighted, drag the start and end markers to select the text you want.§Tap Select all to select everything in the text field.Copying and pasting text1. After you have selected the text you want to copy, tap Copy or Cut. Theselected text is then copied to the clipboard.2. Press and hold a text field in the same or other app until the magnifier appears.3. Drag your finger to move the text cursor to where you want to paste the text.4. After positioning the text cursor, lift your finger. The text selection menu thenpops up.5. Tap Paste.Adjusting input settingsOpen the Touch Input settings by doing one of the following:§From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Language & keyboard> Touch Input.§On the onscreen keyboard, tap the language key (for example, tap if you’recurrently using the English onscreen keyboard). Then on the Internationalkeyboard options menu, tap Settings.You must have more than two keyboard languages selected before you can accessTouch Input settings using the language key.Keyboard types Select the keyboard layout to use.InternationalkeyboardAdd or remove languages from the onscreen keyboardlanguage list.Bilingual prediction Select a secondary keyboard language to use.Text input §Turn on or off predictive text, spell correction, and wordcompletion.§Enable audible or vibration feedback when typing.§Calibrate the touch keyboard accuracy.148 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Tutorial Learn how to use the onscreen keyboard with this interactivetutorial.Trace keyboard Turn on Trace keyboard and set options when tracing toenter text.Personal dictionary Add, edit, or remove words in the predictive text dictionary.149 KeyboardHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Internet connectionsData connectionWhen you turn on HTC Explorer for the first time, it will be automatically set up to useyour mobile operator's data connection (if the SIM card is inserted).Checking the data connection you're using1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Mobile networks > Network operators or Access Point Names.Turning the data connection on or offTurning your data connection off can help save battery life and save money on datacharges. However, if you don’t have data connection turned on and you’re also notconnected to a Wi-Fi network, you won’t receive automatic updates to your email,social network accounts, and other synchronized information.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Select the Mobile network check box to turn on the data connection; clear thecheck box to turn off the data connection.Adding a new access pointBefore you add another data connection, have the access point name and settings(including username and password if required) from your mobile operator ready.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Mobile networks > Access Point Names.3. On the APNs screen, press and then tap New APN.4. On the Edit access point screen, enter the APN settings. Tap an APN settingitem to edit it.5. Press and then tap Save.150 Internet connectionsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Enabling data roamingConnect to your mobile operator’s partner networks and access data services whenyou’re out of your mobile operator’s coverage area.Using data services while roaming will be costly. Check with your mobile operatorfor data roaming rates before you use data roaming.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Mobile networks, and then select the Data roaming check box.Select the Data roaming sound check box if you’d like HTC Explorer to play a soundso you’ll know when it’s connecting to a roaming network.Wi-FiTo use Wi-Fi, you need access to a wireless access point or “hotspot”. The availabilityand strength of the Wi-Fi signal will vary depending on objects, such as buildings orsimply a wall between rooms, the Wi-Fi signal has to pass through.Turning Wi-Fi on and connecting to a wireless network1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Select the Wi-Fi check box to turn Wi-Fi on. HTC Explorer then scans for available wireless networks.3. Tap Wi-Fi settings. Detected Wi-Fi networks will be listed in the Wi-Fi networks section.If the wireless network that you want is not listed, tap Add Wi-Fi network tomanually add it.4. Tap the Wi-Fi network you want to connect to. If you selected a secured network, you'll be asked to enter the network key orpassword.5. Tap Connect.When HTC Explorer is connected to the wireless network, the Wi-Fi icon appearsin the status bar and tells you the approximate signal strength (number of bands thatlight up).The next time HTC Explorer connects to a previously accessed secured wirelessnetwork, you won’t be asked to enter the key or other security information again,unless you reset HTC Explorer to its factory default settings.151 Internet connectionsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Connecting to a Wi-Fi network with EAP-TLS securityYou may need to install a network certificate (*.p12) to HTC Explorer before you canconnect to a Wi-Fi network with EAP-TLS authentication protocol.1. Save the certificate file to the root folder of the storage card.2. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Security.3. Tap Install from SD card.4. Select the network certificate needed to connect to the EAP-TLS network.5. Turn on Wi-Fi and connect to a wireless network.Checking the wireless network status1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. On the Wireless & networks screen, tap Wi-Fi settings, and then tap the wirelessnetwork that HTC Explorer is currently connected to.A message box is then displayed showing the Wi-Fi network name, status, speed,signal strength, and more.If you want to remove the settings for this network, tap Forget. If you want toreconnect to a wireless network that you have removed, you'll need to choose thewireless network from the list of available Wi-Fi networks again. If it is a securedwireless network, you'll need to enter the wireless network credentials again.Connecting to another Wi-Fi network1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Wi-Fi settings. Detected Wi-Fi networks are displayed in the Wi-Finetworks section.3. To manually scan for available Wi-Fi networks, on the Wi-Fi screen, press ,and then tap Scan.4. Tap another Wi-Fi network to connect to it.Connecting to a virtual private network (VPN)Add, set up, and manage virtual private networks (VPNs) so you can connect andaccess resources inside a secured local network, such as your corporate network.Depending on the type of VPN you’re using at work, you may be asked to enter yourlogin credentials and install security certificates before you can connect to yourcompany’s local network. You can get this information from your networkadministrator.Also, HTC Explorer must first establish a Wi-Fi or data connection before you canstart a VPN connection.152 Internet connectionsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Setting up secure credential storageIf your network administrator tells you to download and install security certificates,you must first set up secure credential storage on HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Security.2. Tap Set password.3. Enter a new password for the credential storage.4. Scroll down and confirm the password, and then tap OK.5. Select the Use secure credentials check box.You can then download and install the certificates needed to access your localnetwork. Your network administrator can tell you how to do this.Adding a VPN connection1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap VPN settings > Add VPN, and then tap the type of VPN you want to add.3. Tap the VPN settings and set them up according to the security details yournetwork administrator gave you.4. Press , and then tap Save.The VPN is then added to the VPNs section of the VPN settings screen.Connecting to a VPN1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap VPN settings.3. In the VPNs section, tap the VPN that you want to connect to.4. When asked, enter your log in credentials, and then tap Connect. When you’reconnected, the VPN connected icon appears in the notification area of thetitle bar.You can then open the web browser to access resources such as your corporatenetwork intranet.Disconnecting from a VPN1. Press and hold the title bar, and then slide down your finger to open theNotifications panel.2. Tap the VPN connection to return to the VPN settings screen, and then tap theVPN connection to disconnect from it.When HTC Explorer has disconnected from the VPN, the VPN disconnected icon isdisplayed in the notification area of the title bar.153 Internet connectionsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Using HTC Explorer as a modem(USB tethering)No Internet connection available for your computer? No problem. Use the Internetconnection of HTC Explorer to connect to the Internet.§You need your SIM card inserted on HTC Explorer to use the data connection.§To use HTC Explorer as a modem, you need to install HTC Sync on your computerfirst.§You must have an approved data plan associated with your account from yourmobile service provider to use this service.1. Make sure the data connection on HTC Explorer is turned on.2. Connect HTC Explorer to the computer using the provided USB cable.3. On the Choose a connection type screen, select USB tethering, and then tapDone.Connecting HTC Explorer to the Internetthrough a computer (Internet Pass-through)If you temporarily don’t have Internet access, you can still go online on HTC Explorerby using your computer’s Internet connection.Before you can use your computer as a modem, be sure to install HTC Sync onyour computer first.1. Make sure your computer is connected to the Internet. Two things to check for your computer’s Internet connection. One, you may needto turn off your local network’s firewall. Two, if your computer connects to theInternet via PPP (e.g. Dial UP, xDSL, or VPN), Internet Pass-through will onlysupport TCP protocol.2. Connect HTC Explorer to the computer using the provided USB cable.3. On the Choose a connection type screen, select Internet pass-through, and thentap Done.154 Internet connectionsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
BluetoothBluetooth basicsTurning Bluetooth on or off1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Select or clear the Bluetooth check box.An even easier way to turn Bluetooth on or off is with the Bluetooth widget on theHome screen.Turn off Bluetooth when not in use to save battery power, or in places where usinga wireless device is prohibited, such as on board an aircraft and in hospitals.Changing the device nameThe device name identifies HTC Explorer to other devices.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.4. Tap Device name.5. Enter the new name for HTC Explorer in the dialog box, and then tap OK.Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kitYou can listen to music over a Bluetooth stereo headset, or have hands-freeconversations using a compatible Bluetooth headset or car kit. It’s the sameprocedure to set up stereo audio and hands-free.§For you to listen to music with your headset or car kit, the headset or car kit mustsupport the A2DP Bluetooth profile.§Before you connect your headset, you need to make it discoverable soHTC Explorer can find it. You can find out how to do this by referring to yourheadset manual.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.155 BluetoothHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
4. Make sure that the headset is discoverable.5. Tap Scan for devices. HTC Explorer will start to scan for Bluetooth deviceswithin range.6. When you see the name of your headset displayed in the Bluetooth devicessection, tap the name. HTC Explorer then automatically tries to pair with theheadset.7. If automatic pairing fails, enter the passcode supplied with your headset.The pairing and connection status is displayed below the hands-free headset or car kitname in the Bluetooth devices section. When the Bluetooth headset or car kit isconnected to HTC Explorer, the Bluetooth connected icon is displayed in thestatus bar. Depending on the type of headset or car kit you have connected, you canthen start using the headset or car kit.Reconnecting a headset or car kitNormally, you can easily reconnect your headset by switching on Bluetooth onHTC Explorer, and then turning on the headset. However, you might have to connectmanually if your headset has been used with another Bluetooth device.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.4. Make sure that the headset is discoverable.5. Tap the headset’s name in the Bluetooth devices section.6. If prompted to enter a passcode, try 0000 or 1234, or consult the headset/carkit documentation to find the passcode.If you still cannot reconnect to the headset or car kit, follow the instructions in Unpairing from a Bluetooth device on page 157, and then follow the steps under Connecting a Bluetooth headset or car kit on page 155.Disconnecting or unpairing from a BluetoothdeviceDisconnecting a Bluetooth device1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.3. In the Bluetooth devices section, press and hold the device to disconnect.4. Tap Disconnect.156 BluetoothHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Unpairing from a Bluetooth deviceYou can make HTC Explorer forget its pairing connection with another Bluetoothdevice. Doing so may require you to enter or confirm a passcode again if you want toreconnect to the other device.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.3. In the Bluetooth devices section, press and hold the device to unpair.4. Tap Disconnect & unpair, or tap Unpair if the Bluetooth device is currently notconnected to HTC Explorer.Sending information using BluetoothYou can use Bluetooth to send information from HTC Explorer to another Bluetoothenabled device such as a phone or notebook computer. You can send the followingtypes of information, depending on the device you are sending to:§Images and videos§Calendar events§Contacts§Audio filesBefore you begin, set the receiving device to discoverable mode. You may alsoneed to set it to “Receive Beams” or “Receive Files”. Refer to the device’sdocumentation for instructions on receiving information over Bluetooth.1. On HTC Explorer, open the app that contains the information or file you want tosend.2. Follow the steps for the type of item you want to send:Captured photo orvideoAfter capturing, on the Camera preview screen, tap ,and then tap Bluetooth.Photos or videos 1. On the Gallery app, choose an album.2. Tap > Bluetooth.3. Choose the photos and videos you want to share, andthen tap Next.Contact 1. On the People app, tap a contact to view the contact'sdetails.2. Press and then tap Send contact.3. Tap the down arrow icon, and then select Bluetooth.4. Choose which details to share, and then tap Send.157 BluetoothHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Calendarappointment oreventIn Day view, Agenda view, or Week view, press and holdthe event, and then tap Forward > Bluetooth.Music track 1. With the track displayed on the Music app’s Now playingscreen, tap > Share > Share file.2. Tap Bluetooth.Voice recording On the main Voice Recorder screen, tap , and then tapBluetooth.3. Turn on Bluetooth if you’re asked to do so.4. If you haven't paired with the receiving device before, tap Scan for devices.5. Tap the name of the receiving device.6. If prompted, accept the pairing request on HTC Explorer and on the receivingdevice. Also enter the same passcode or confirm the auto-generated passcodeon both devices.7. On the receiving device, accept the file.Where sent information is savedWhen you send information using Bluetooth, the location where it's saved depends onthe type of information and the receiving device.If you send a calendar event or contact, it is normally added directly to thecorresponding application on the receiving device. For example, if you send acalendar event to a compatible phone, the event is shown in that phone’s calendarapplication.If you send another file type to a Windows computer, it is normally saved in theBluetooth Exchange folder within your personal document folders.§On Windows XP, the path may be: C:\Documents and Settings\[yourusername]\My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange§On Windows Vista, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\Documents§On Windows 7, the path may be: C:\Users\[your username]\My Documents\Bluetooth Exchange FolderIf you send a file to another device, the saved location may depend on the file type.For example, if you send an image file to another mobile phone, it may be saved in afolder named “Images”.Receiving information using BluetoothHTC Explorer lets you receive various files with Bluetooth, including photos, musictracks, and documents such as PDFs.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Wireless & networks.2. Tap Bluetooth settings.158 BluetoothHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. If the Bluetooth check box is not selected, select it to turn Bluetooth on.4. Select the Discoverable check box.5. On the sending device, send one or more files to HTC Explorer. Refer to thedevice’s documentation for instructions on sending information over Bluetooth.6. If asked, accept the pairing request on HTC Explorer and on the receivingdevice. Also enter the same passcode or confirm the auto-generated passcodeon both devices. You'll then get a Bluetooth authorization request.7. If you want to automatically receive files from the sending device in future,select the Always check box.8. Tap Accept or OK.9. When HTC Explorer receives a file transfer request notification, slide down theNotifications panel, tap the incoming file notification, and then tap Accept.10. When a file is transferred, a notification is displayed. To open the fileimmediately, slide down the Notifications panel, and then tap the relevantnotification.When you open a received file, what happens next depends on the file type:§Media files and documents are usually opened directly in a compatible app. Forexample, if you open a music track, it starts playing in the Music app.§For a vCalendar file, choose the calendar where you want to save the event, andthen tap Import. The vCalendar is added to your Calendar events.§For a vCard contact file, you can choose to import one, several, or all of thosecontacts to your contacts list.Adding the Bluetooth received folder to the Home screenYou can add a folder to the Home screen that shows all files you have received withBluetooth.1. From the Home screen, press and then tap Personalize.2. On the Personalize screen, tap Folder > Bluetooth received.3. Press and hold the Bluetooth received folder icon, and drag it to the Homescreen position you want.To view the folder contents, tap the folder icon. To open a file, tap the file name.159 BluetoothHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
SecurityProtecting your SIM card with a PINAdd another layer of security for HTC Explorer by assigning a PIN (personalidentification number) to your SIM.Make sure you have the default SIM PIN provided by your mobile operator beforecontinuing.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Security.2. Tap Set up SIM card lock, then select Lock SIM card.3. Enter the default SIM card PIN, and then tap OK.4. To change the SIM card PIN, tap Change SIM PIN.Restoring a SIM card that has been locked outIf you enter the wrong PIN more times than the maximum number of attemptsallowed, your SIM card will become “PUK-locked.”You need a PUK code to restore access to HTC Explorer. This code may have beenprovided by your mobile operator when you received your SIM card.1. On the Phone dialer screen, enter the PUK code, and then tap Next.2. Enter the new PIN you want to use, and then tap Next.3. Enter the new PIN again, and then tap OK.Protecting HTC Explorer with a screen lockpattern, PIN, or passwordProtect your personal information and prevent others from using HTC Explorerwithout your permission by setting a screen lock pattern, PIN or password.Your screen lock will be asked every time HTC Explorer is turned on or when it’s idlefor a certain period of time.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Security.2. Tap Set up screen lock.160 SecurityHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap one of the following:None Disable the screen lock you’ve previously created.Pattern Set a screen lock pattern by following the onscreen instructions.PIN Set a numeric password of at least four digits.Password Set an alpha-numeric password.4. On the Security screen, tap Lock phone after, then specify the idle time you canallow before the screen is locked. You can also clear the Use visible pattern or Visible passwords on the Securityscreen if you don’t want your screen lock to display as you enter it onscreen.Changing your screen lock1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Security.2. Tap Change screen lock.3. Enter your current screen lock to confirm that you want to change it.4. Choose a different screen lock type, then enter your new pattern, PIN, orpassword. Or tap None if you don’t want to use a screen lock.Forgot your screen lock pattern?If you’ve forgotten your screen lock pattern, you have up to five attempts totry and unlock HTC Explorer.If this fails, you can unlock HTC Explorer by entering your Google Accountuser name and password.1. On the unlock screen, enter your lock pattern.2. After the fifth attempt, when you’re asked to wait for 30 seconds, tapOK.3. If the display goes off, press the POWER button to turn the display backon, and then unlock the screen.4. Tap the Forgot pattern? button when it appears.5. Enter your Google Account name and password, and then tap Sign in.You’ll then be asked to create a new screen lock pattern. If you nolonger want to do so, tap Cancel.161 SecurityHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Encrypting data on HTC ExplorerYou can encrypt data on HTC Explorer such as your online accounts, settings, andother information.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap SD & phone storage.3. Under Internal storage, tap Storage encryption.4. Set a password, and then tap OK. The encryption process starts.If you want to stop encrypting new information on HTC Explorer, deselect the Storageencryption checkbox.162 SecurityHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
SettingsSettings on HTC ExplorerControl and customize phone settings on the Settings screen.From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.Personalize Make HTC Explorer truly yours with the various personalizationoptions available.Wireless &networksSet up wireless connections, such as Wi-Fi, data connection, andBluetooth, enable Airplane mode, and more.Call Set up call services such as voicemail, call forwarding, call waiting,and caller ID.Sound §Choose sounds to use for the ringtones and notifications.§Adjust media playback volume.§Set to lower the ring volume when you move HTC Explorer whenit’s ringing, make it ring louder when inside a bag or pocket, andturn on the speakerphone when you flip it over.Display Set up display settings such as automatic screen orientation,brightness, screen timeout, and more.Accounts &sync§Log in or out of your social network accounts, Google Account,and Exchange ActiveSync account.§Sign in or out of your HTCSense.com account.§You can also manage synchronization and other settings for youraccounts.Location §Select the sources to use when determining your location.§Select Phone finder so you can use HTCSense.com to locateHTC Explorer.Search Select items to include when you do a search and set Googlesearch options.Privacy §Choose to automatically back up some settings (e.g. Wi-Fipasswords or Bookmarks) to Google servers using your GoogleAccount so you can restore them when needed.§If you don't want missed calls and your received text messageappear on the lock screen, clear the Display message text checkbox.163 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Connect to PC §Set the default USB connection type to use whenever youconnect HTC Explorer to your computer.§Or, select the Ask me check box to set HTC Explorer to alwaysdisplay the screen for selecting the USB connection type.Security Set a screen lock, enable the SIM card lock, or manage thecredential storage.Power §Turn on power saver to automatically switch to power savingmode when the battery level goes down to the level that you set.§Another power saving option is to select Enable sleep mode. Thiswill turn off auto sync of data in your online accounts.Applications §Manage running applications, move applications to or from thestorage card, check how much storage is used by apps, and installor uninstall programs.§Choose how much free memory remains before you're notifiedabout low memory space.SD & phonestorage§Check the available space in the internal storage and your storagecard.§From this screen, be sure to unmount your storage card beforeyou remove it from HTC Explorer.§Erase the storage card to start afresh and if you don't need tokeep the content. You need to unmount the storage card firstbefore you can erase it.§Clear out the cache used by apps, move apps or uninstall apps ifHTC Explorer is running low on memory.§You can also do a factory reset.Date & time §Set the date and time, time zone, and date or time format.§Choose the time and date formats that suit you.Language &keyboardSet the operating system language and region. You can also setonscreen keyboard options.Accessibility Use these settings when you’ve downloaded and installed anaccessibility tool, such as a screen reader that provides voicefeedback. You can turn accessibility functions or services on or off.164 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Voice input &outputSet up the voice input options. Also, if you’ve installed a text-to-speech (voice data) application, use this to set the text-to-speechsettings.About phone §Turn on or off scheduled checks for system software updates, ormanually check for updates.§Turn Tell HTC on or off. When enabled, you're helping us know ifHTC Explorer encounters a technical problem.§View different information about HTC Explorer, such as themobile network type, signal strength, battery level, and more.Changing display settingsAdjusting the screen brightness manually1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Display > Brightness.3. Clear the Automatic brightness check box.4. Drag the brightness slider to the left to decrease or to the right to increase thescreen brightness.5. Tap OK.Adjusting the time before the screen turns offAfter a period of inactivity, the screen turns off to conserve battery power. You canset the idle time before the screen turns off.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Display > Screen timeout.3. Tap the time before the screen turns off.Turning automatic screen rotation offBy default, the screen orientation automatically adjusts depending on how you holdHTC Explorer.Automatic rotation is not supported in all application screens.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Display.3. Clear the Auto-rotate screen check box.165 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Recalibrating the G-sensorRecalibrate the screen if you feel that the screen orientation does not respondproperly to the way you hold HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Display > G-Sensor calibration.3. Place HTC Explorer on a flat and level surface, and then tap Calibrate.4. After the recalibration process, tap OK.Keeping the screen on while charging HTC ExplorerYou can keep the screen from turning off while you’re charging HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Applications > Development.3. Select the Stay awake check box.Switching animation effects on or offYou can turn off the animation or enable only some animations when switchingbetween screens.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Display > Animation.3. On the options menu, select the animation setting you want.Changing sound settingsSwitching between silent, vibration, and normal modesDo one of the following:§To change back from silent to normal mode, simply press the VOLUME UPbutton.§To change back from vibration to normal mode, press the VOLUME UP buttontwice.§From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings > Sound > Sound profile.Enabling or disabling audible selectionYou can choose to play a sound when you’re selecting items onscreen.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Sound.3. Select or clear the Audible selection check box.166 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Lowering the ring volume automaticallyHTC Explorer has a quiet ring feature that automatically lowers the ring volume whenyou move it.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Sound.3. Select or clear the Quiet ring on pickup check box.Making HTC Explorer ring louder with Pocket modeTo help avoid missing incoming calls when HTC Explorer is in your pocket or bag, thepocket mode feature gradually increases the ring volume and vibrates when youreceive a call. When not in your pocket or bag, HTC Explorer will ring at the normalvolume you set.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Sound.3. Select or clear the Pocket mode check box.Switching to speakerphone automaticallyWhen you're on a call, you can switch to speakerphone by simply flippingHTC Explorer over.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Sound.3. Select or clear the Flip for speaker check box.Changing the languageWhen you turn HTC Explorer on for the first time, you’re asked to choose thelanguage you want to use. If you want, you can still change the language after you setup HTC Explorer. Changing the language adjusts the keyboard layout, date and timeformatting, and more.The languages available to choose from may depend on the version of HTC Exploreryou have.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Language & keyboard > Select language.167 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. Tap the language and corresponding region you want to use.4. Press to return to the Home screen. The new language will be applied after afew seconds.Optimizing battery lifeYou can set HTC Explorer to automatically switch to power saver mode when thebattery level reaches a certain level.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Power.3. Tap Power mode > Economy.4. Tap Turn power saver on at, and then select when to switch to power savermode.5. Tap Economy mode settings, and then set and select the behavior whenHTC Explorer switches to power saver mode.Switching to GSM network modeSwitch to using GSM network if you’re not using a data connection to connect to theInternet. Connecting to GSM network mode consumes less battery power.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Wireless & networks > Mobile networks > Network Mode.3. Tap GSM only.Checking the power usage of applications1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap About phone > Battery > Battery use.168 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Scheduling HTC Explorer to switch to Sleep modeSet the Sleep mode schedule on HTC Explorer so it doesn't consume too muchbattery power when it's not plugged in at night.Unlike the usual Sleep mode when you press the POWER button to turn off thescreen display, a scheduled Sleep mode turns off the Wi-Fi and data connectionsduring the Sleep mode schedule you defined.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Power > Enable sleep mode.3. Tap any of the following:Automatic Select to automatically switch HTC Explorer to Sleep mode.HTC Explorer adjusts its Sleep mode schedule over a period oftime around what it detects as your bedtime.Manual Select to specify the Sleep mode start and end time.Never Select to turn scheduled Sleep mode off.Managing memoryChecking how much phone memory is available for use1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap SD & phone storage. The available phone memory is displayed in theInternal storage section.Checking the available storage card space1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap SD & phone storage. The total and available storage card space is displayedin the SD card section.Making more storage spaceEasily free up some storage by cleaning up the application cache, moving oruninstalling apps, and deleting old mails and messages all in one go.You cannot move or uninstall preinstalled apps.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap SD & phone storage > Make more space.169 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
3. On the Clear caches screen, choose whether to clear the cache of rarely usedapps only or all apps, and then tap Next.4. On the Application storage screen:§Tap Move apps to SD card if there are apps that you can transfer to thestorage card.§Tap Uninstall apps if there are apps you'd like to remove.5. Tap Next.6. On the Mail & message storage screen:§Set fewer days of mails to download so that older mails will be removedfrom the storage automatically.§Lower the number of text and multimedia messages per conversation.7. Tap Finish.Clearing application cache and data1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.3. On the All tab, tap an application.4. On the screen, tap Clear data and/or Clear cache.Uninstalling third-party applicationsYou cannot uninstall applications that are preinstalled on HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.3. On the Downloaded tab, tap the application you want to uninstall.4. Tap Uninstall.Moving applications to or from the storage cardMove downloaded applications to the storage card if the internal storage onHTC Explorer is getting low. Or, if your storage card is getting full, you can also moveapplications from the storage card to the internal storage.You can only move applications that are not preinstalled on HTC Explorer.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap Applications > Manage applications.3. On the Downloaded tab, tap the application you want to move.4. Tap Move to SD card or Move to phone.170 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Stopping running applications using Task ManagerUse Task Manager to free up memory by stopping running applications that you'renot currently using.1. From the Home screen, tap > Task Manager.2. In the All applications list, tap to the right of the application name to stop it.Checking information about HTC Explorer1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap About phone.3. Select one of the following:SoftwareupdatesEnable or disable the automatic check feature for softwareupdates for HTC Explorer. You can also tap Check now tomanually check for software updates.Tell HTC Turn Tell HTC on or off. When enabled, you’re helping usknow if HTC Explorer encounters a technical problem. Youcan also choose when you want to send error reports.Network Check information about your mobile network and itsservice status.Phone identity Check information about HTC Explorer and the SIM cardyou’re using.Battery Check information about the battery such as its currentbattery level, status, and what programs are using thebattery.HardwareinformationCheck the Wi-Fi MAC and Bluetooth addresses.SoftwareinformationCheck the version and other information about the Androidplatform being used by HTC Explorer. You can also checkthe version of the web browser.LegalinformationRead legal information from HTC and Google, and licensesused by HTC Explorer.171 SettingsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Update and resetSoftware updatesFrom time to time, software updates for HTC Explorer may be available. HTC Explorercan check and then notify you if there’s a new update. You can then download andinstall the software update using the Wi-Fi or data connection. You can also manuallycheck if there's an available software update.Depending on the type of update, the update may erase all your personal data andcustomized settings, and also remove any applications you’ve installed. Make sure thatyou’ve backed up the information and files you want to keep.Checking and downloading software updates may incur extra data fees.Installing an updateWhen the Internet connection is on and there's a new update available, the systemupdate dialog box appears and guides you through the process.1. If you don't see the dialog box, check for the update notification icon in thestatus bar. Slide open the Notifications panel, and then tap the update notification.2. In the system update dialog box, choose what type of connection to use fordownloading the update. Follow the onscreen prompts to start the download.3. After the download is complete, tap Install now and then tap OK in the Installsystem software update dialog box.Wait for the update to finish. HTC Explorer will then restart automatically.Checking for updates manually1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap About phone > Software updates > Check now.172 Update and resetHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Restarting HTC ExplorerIf HTC Explorer is running slower than normal, an application is not performingproperly, or HTC Explorer becomes unresponsive, try restarting HTC Explorer and seeif that helps solve the problem.1. If the display is off, press the POWER button to turn it back on.2. Unlock the display.3. Press and hold the POWER button, and then tap Restart.4. When asked to confirm, tap Restart. If these steps don't work, you can remove and replace the battery, and then turnHTC Explorer on to restart it.Resetting HTC ExplorerDo a factory reset to return HTC Explorer to its original state before the first time youturned it on.If you’re passing HTC Explorer on to someone else or HTC Explorer has a persistentproblem that cannot be solved, you can perform a factory reset (also called a hardreset). Factory reset is not a step to be taken lightly. It’ll permanently delete all yourdata and customized settings, and will remove any applications you’ve downloadedand installed. Be sure to back up any data and files you want to keep before you do afactory reset.Performing a factory reset via settingsThe most convenient way to do a factory reset is via the settings.1. From the Home screen, press , and then tap Settings.2. Tap SD & phone storage > Factory data reset.3. Tap Reset phone, and then tap Erase everything.Performing a factory reset using hardware buttonsIf you can’t turn HTC Explorer on or access settings, you can still perform a factoryreset by using the hardware buttons on HTC Explorer.1. Remove the battery, wait for a few seconds, then reinsert the battery.2. Press and hold the VOLUME DOWN button, and then briefly press the POWERbutton.3. Wait for the screen with the three Android images to appear, and then releasethe VOLUME DOWN button.4. Press VOLUME DOWN to select FACTORY RESET, and then press the POWERbutton.173 Update and resetHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
Trademarks and copyrights©2011 HTC Corporation. All Rights Reserved.HTC, the HTC logo, the HTC quietly brilliant logo, HTC Explorer, HTC Sense, and HTCSync are trademarks or service marks of HTC Corporation.©2011 Google Inc. Used with permission. Google, the Google logo, Android, theAndroid logo, Android Market, the Android Market logo, Google Apps, GoogleCalendar, Google Checkout, Google Earth, Google Latitude, Google Maps, GoogleTalk, Gmail, Picasa, and YouTube are trademarks of Google Inc.Microsoft, Windows, ActiveSync, Outlook, Windows Media, and Windows Vista areeither registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the UnitedStates and/or other countries.Bluetooth and the Bluetooth logo are trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc.This device contains Adobe® Flash® Player software under license from AdobeSystems Incorporated. Copyright ©1995–2011 Adobe Systems Incorporated. All rightsreserved. Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.Wi-Fi is a registered trademark of the Wireless Fidelity Alliance, Inc.microSD is a trademark of SD Card Association.Facebook is a trademark of Facebook, Inc.iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc.All other company, product and service names mentioned herein are trademarks,registered trademarks or service marks of their respective owners.HTC shall not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained herein,nor for incidental or consequential damages resulting from furnishing this material.The information is provided “as is” without warranty of any kind and is subject tochange without notice. HTC also reserves the right to revise the content of thisdocument at any time without prior notice.No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by anymeans, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording or storing in aretrieval system, or translated into any language in any form without prior writtenpermission of HTC.174 Trademarks and copyrightsHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
IndexSymbols3G 150AAirplane mode 48Alarm 96Android Market 93Apps- deleting 94- installing 93, 138BBack up contacts 66Battery- installing 13- optimizing battery life 168Bluetooth- connecting a Bluetooth headset orcar kit 155- disconnecting or unpairing 156- sending information 157- sharing music 92- turning on or off 155Browser- bookmarks 53- navigating and zooming 51- opening a new window 51- options 54- using 50CCalendar- creating an event 122- managing events 124- reminders 126- settings 126- views 123- widget 127Call history 45Camera- basics 78- effects 80- recording a video 80- taking a photo 79- zooming 79Change phone language 167Sound- audible selection 166- lowering ring volumeautomatically 167- Pocket mode 167- switching profiles 166- switching to speakerphone 167Clock 95Conference call 43Contacts- adding 63- copying from SIM card 62- deleting 67Copying text 26DData connection- access point 150- turning on or off 150Delete apps 94Delete contacts 67Display- adjusting screen brightness 165- changing the time before the screenturns off 165- recalibrating G-sensor 166- turning off screen rotation 165Downloading- from Web 52- viewing downloads 53EEmail 113Exchange ActiveSync- Out of office 121175 IndexHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
- sending a meeting request 121- working with Exchange ActiveSyncemail 120FFacebook- sharing your location 75Facebook for HTC Sense 73Factory reset 173Firmware 172Flight mode 48FM Radio 100GGallery- about 82- editing photos 84- sending photos and videos 85- sharing photos and videos 86- viewing photos 83- viewing photos in social networks 88- watching video 84Getting started 8Gmail 112Google Account 56Google Maps 128HHands free 155Hard reset 173Headphones 155Home dialing 46Home screen- about 17- adding widgets 30- extended 17- rearranging items 32- rearranging the home panels 33HTC Clock- Desk Clock 95- setting an alarm 96- World Clock 95HTCSense.com 140IIcons- notification icons 22- status icons 21Internet calling 44Internet connection- data connection 150- Internet pass-through 154- Tethering 154- VPN 152- Wi-Fi 151Internet pass-through 154KKeyboard- copying and pasting text 148- dictionary 145- editing text 147- entering text 143- entering text by speaking 146- predictive text 144- selecting text 147LLanguage 167Leap view 18Locations- turning on location services 128MMail- adding a POP3/IMAP account 114- adding an Exchange account 114- deleting an email account 121- managing email messages 117- sending 117- sorting email messages 116- unified inbox 115- working with Exchange ActiveSyncemail 120Making a call 38Managing memory 169Market 93Master reset 173Meeting request 121Messages- copying to the SIM card 109176 IndexHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
- deleting 109- deleting a conversation 110- forwarding 107- protecting from deletion 109- viewing 106microSD card 12MMS 104Modem- USB tethering 154- using your computer 154Multimedia message 104Music- browsing the library 90- copying music to storage card 25- listening 89- playing music from Lock screen 89- playlist 90- setting a song as ringtone 92- sharing music using Bluetooth 92- widget 90NNotifications- icons 21- panel 23OOnline accounts- about 56- managing 57Onscreen keyboard- copying and pasting text 148- dictionary 145- editing text 147- entering text 143- entering text by speaking 146- predictive text 144- selecting text 147- settings 148Optimizing battery life 168PPair a Bluetooth device 155People- adding a new contact 63- deleting contacts 67- editing a contact 67- filtering your contacts 61- groups 69- merging contact information 65- searching for a contact 63- widget 71Phone calls- calling a number in a message 40- calling a number in an email 40- calling using Wi-Fi 44- making an emergency call 40- receiving 41- setting up a conference call 43Phone information 171Phone settings- About phone 171- Applications 169- Display 165- Language & keyboard 167- Power 168- SD & phone storage 169- Sound 166Phone updates 172Photos- copying to/from storage card 25- editing 84- sharing 86- viewing 83Playing music from the Lock screen 89PUK (PIN Unblock Key) 160QQuick Settings 24RRadio 100Record your voice 101Ring volume- lowering ring volumeautomatically 167- making your phone ring louder 167Ringtone- setting 92SScenes 28Screen- adjusting screen brightness 165177 IndexHTC Confidential 2011/09/16
- changing the time before the screenturns off 165- recalibrating G-sensor 166- turning off screen rotation 165SD card 12Search 49, 50Security- changing your screen lock 161- locking with a screen lock pattern,PIN, or password 160- locking your SIM card with a PIN 160Settings- About phone 171- Applications 169- Language & keyboard 167- Power 168- SD & phone storage 169- Sound 166Sharing- games and apps 102SIM card- copying a message 109- inserting 11- removing 11- SIM PIN 160Sleep mode 20Slideshow 83Smart dial 39SMS 103Social networks- adding 57- viewing photos 88Software update 172Sound set 34Speakerphone 43Speed dial 39Storage card- copying files 25- moving apps to the storage card 170Sync- online accounts 58TTethering 154Text message 103Translate 50UUpdating phone software 172Upgrade 172USB 25, 154VVideos- recording 80- sharing 86- watching 84Voice input 146Voice Recorder 101Volume- adjusting during phone calls 19- adjusting media 19- adjusting ringer 19VPN- adding a connection 153- connecting 153WWallpaper- changing 29Weather- adding cities 98- checking weather 98Web browser 50Wi-Fi- calling 44- connecting to another network 152- network status 152- turning on 151Widgets- adding 30- changing settings 31- removing 33YYouTube- sharing videos 87178 IndexHTC Confidential 2011/09/16

Navigation menu